Psychology
& Sociology
2010
L ES S MA N A G IN G . M OR E T E A C H IN G . GRE AT E R L E A R N IN G . What is Connect?
Connect Features:
McGraw-Hill Connect™ is an online assignment and assessment solution that connects your students with the tools and resources they’ll need to achieve success.
McGraw-Hill Connect offers a number of powerful tools and features to make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more time teaching. With Connect, students can engage with their coursework anytime and anywhere, making the learning process more accessible and efficient.
With Connect, enjoy simple course management so you can spend less time administering and more time teaching. You’ll have access to rich course resources and tools that drive performance like never before.
Simple assignment management With Connect, creating assignments is easier than ever, so you can spend more time teaching and less time managing. Smart grading When it comes to studying, time is precious. Connect helps students learn more efficiently by providing feedback and practice material when they need it, where they need it. Personalized Diagnostic and Learning Plan Personal learning Plan assess students understanding of key concepts with diagnostics and adaptive questions; then tailor coaching and practice materials to each student’s skills and knowledge gaps ConnectPlus eBooks Connect reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student. Every Connect subject area is seamlessly integrated with ConnectPlus eBooks, which are designed to keep students focused on the concepts key to their success.
Learning is more than memorizing concepts. It’s figuring out how to apply them. And no other web-based solution gives you the power to turn learning into success than Connect Psychology.
Easily Create Assignments Connect Psychology allows you to create and deliver online, autograded homework assignments, quizzes, and tests directly from your textbook’s end –of-chapter materials or test bank. You customized assignments can be created in just 4 simple steps.
Impressive Reporting Solutions With Connect’s detailed reporting, you can quickly assess how students are doing in regards to overall class performance; specific objectives; individual assignments; and each question!
McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect, Connect Plus provides all of the Connect features plus the following: An integrated, printable eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or questions is covered. Assign sections of the eBook to your students as readings with engaging audio files, animations and videos embedded within the eBook. Instructors have the ability to share notes, highlights, bookmarks, figures and animations with their students. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap! Pagination that exactly matches the printed text, allowing students to rely on Connect Plus as the complete resource for your course.
Learn and View Connect Psychology Demo at www.mcgrawhillconnect.com
Built around metacognition learning theory, LearnSmart provides your students with a GPS (Guided Path to Success) for your course. Using artificial intelligence, LearnSmart intelligently assesses a student’s knowledge of course content through a series of adaptive questions. It pinpoints concepts the student does not understand and maps out a personalized study plan for success. Connect to Content: Simulation allows students to practice course critical content. Learn More Effectively: Personal learning path is created based upon student knowledge level. Anywhere, At Your Pace: Students can access LearnSmart anytime and from anywhere that has internet access including the iPhone or iPod Touch.
Connect Psychology is available with: Feist Psychology: Marking Connections,1e, 2010 Feldman Essential of Understanding Psychology, 8e, 2009 Feldman Understanding Psychology, 9E, 2009
To view a demo, visit www.mhhe.com/learnsmart
King The Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View, 1e, 2008 Passer Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior,4e, 2008
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 4UAS"ASIN,INKs3INGAPORE 4EL s&AX
Contact your local McGraw-Hill representative to learn more about Connect Psychology and Learnsmart.
#USTOMER3ERVICE(OTLINE Email:
[email protected] Website: www.mheducation.asia
Your Partner in Test Generation Imagine being able to create and access you test anywhere, at any time without installing the testing software. Now, with the newest release of EZ Test Online, instructors can select questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks, author their own and then either print the test for paper distribution or give it online.
Features and Functions N Test Creation N
Online Test Management
N
Online Scoring and Reporting
N EZ Test is designed to make it simple for you to select questions from McGraw-Hill test banks. You can use a single McGraw-Hill test bank, or easily choose questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks. N EZ Test supports the use of following question types: NTrue or False NFill In the Blank NYes or No NNumeric Response NMultiple Choice NMatching NCheck All That Apply NRanking
NShort Answer NSurvey NEssay
N Uses variables to create algorithmic questions for any question type. N You can create multiple versions of the same test. N You can scramble questions to create different versions of your test. N
Automated scoring for most of EZ test’s numerous questions types.
How do you get it? To learn if it is available with your book, contact your local McGraw-Hill Education Representatives or email
[email protected].
www.blackboard.com
/
www.webct.com
course management systems
Course Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer you another way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGrawHill Online Learning Center content is formatted to save you hours of computer inputting.
How instructors use it Load McGraw-Hill content into your platform and you will have a fully populated course online. You can then customize the content to match your syllabus. You will also be able to assign specific exercises, quizzes, or readings to your students. Grades are posetd automatically to let you know how students are doing as a whole, or individually. Built-in communication allows you to conduct live chats, oversee bulletin board topics, and e-mail students who might need more help than others.
How students use it Students can visit your online course via the Internet to check the coursework you have assigned. The platform will record the students’ progress through your course, which will enable you to see where they are studying most. Self-grading quizzes also indicate exactly where students need further review. The platform’s communicaiton system encourages student collaboration with features such as live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletin boards, or traditional e-mail.
Introductory Psychology .......................................................................................5 Introductory Psychology ........................................................................................................... 7 Introductory Psychology – Readers ....................................................................................... 16
Developmental Psychology ................................................................................19 Adolescence – Reader / Cases .............................................................................................. 34 Adolescence – Texts .............................................................................................................. 32 Adulthood and Aging .............................................................................................................. 35 Adulthood and Aging – Readers............................................................................................. 36 Child Development – Chronological ....................................................................................... 27 Child Development – Topical .................................................................................................. 29 Child Development – Readers / Cases .................................................................................. 30 Child, Family & Society .......................................................................................................... 31 Developmental Psychopathology ........................................................................................... 39 Gender Role Development ..................................................................................................... 40 Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ................................................................... 21 Human Development / Lifespan – Topical .............................................................................. 24 Human Development / Lifespan – Readers ........................................................................... 25
Educational Psychology .....................................................................................43 Death and Dying..................................................................................................................... 51 Child, Family & Society – Readers ......................................................................................... 50 Educational Psychology ......................................................................................................... 45 Educational Psychology – Readers........................................................................................ 48 Infants & Toddlers ................................................................................................................... 50
Social and Personality Psychology.....................................................................53 Advanced Social Psychology ................................................................................................. 58 Attitudes and Behavior ........................................................................................................... 57 Health Psychology.................................................................................................................. 62 Interpersonal Relations .......................................................................................................... 62 Intimacy .................................................................................................................................. 59 Motivation and Emotion .......................................................................................................... 63 Personality.............................................................................................................................. 57 Psychology of Prejudice ......................................................................................................... 62 Psychology of Women and Gender ........................................................................................ 60 Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader ........................................................................ 60 Social Psychology – Texts ...................................................................................................... 55 Social Psychology – Readers................................................................................................. 56
Cover design images©istockphoto.com
1
DEVELOPMENT OF CONTENT TABLEENGLISH
PSYCHOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENT
Clinical Psychology.............................................................................................65 Abnormal Psychology............................................................................................................. 67 Abnormal Psychology – Readers ........................................................................................... 68 Counseling ............................................................................................................................. 69 Developmental Psychopathology ........................................................................................... 72 Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ............................................................................................... 69 Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers.............................................................................. 70
Experimental Psychology ...................................................................................73 Cognitive Psychology ............................................................................................................. 79 Perception .............................................................................................................................. 79 Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology ............................................................................. 80 Research Methods ................................................................................................................. 75 SPSS/SAS.............................................................................................................................. 77 Tests and Measurements ....................................................................................................... 78
Applied Psychology ............................................................................................81 Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior ................................................................... 83 Sports Psychology.................................................................................................................. 83
Psychology History & Systems ...........................................................................85 History and Systems .............................................................................................................. 86
Human Sexuality ................................................................................................87 Human Sexuality .................................................................................................................... 89 Human Sexuality – Readers................................................................................................... 90
2
Sociology ..........................................................................................................117 Comparative Societies ......................................................................................................... 156 Criminology .......................................................................................................................... 145 Criminology – Readers ......................................................................................................... 146 Drugs & Society.................................................................................................................... 143 Drugs & Society – Readers .................................................................................................. 144 Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers........................................................................ 123 Introductory Sociology ............................................................................................................ 99 Introductory Sociology – Readers ........................................................................................ 104 Marriage & the Family ...........................................................................................................111 Marriage & the Family – Readers......................................................................................... 113 Medical Sociology – Readers ............................................................................................... 122 Political Sociology ................................................................................................................ 129 Race and Ethnicity ............................................................................................................... 126 Race and Ethnicity – Readers .............................................................................................. 128 Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality..................................................................................... 118 Research Methods ............................................................................................................... 141 Sex Roles ............................................................................................................................. 154 Social Inequality / Social Stratification.................................................................................. 131 Social Problems ................................................................................................................... 108 Social Problems – Readers .................................................................................................. 108 Social Psychology ................................................................................................................ 139 Social Psychology – Readers............................................................................................... 141 Sociological Theory .............................................................................................................. 133 Sociological Theory – Readers ............................................................................................ 135 Sociology of Death ............................................................................................................... 124 Sociology of Death – Readers.............................................................................................. 124 Sociology of Education – Readers ....................................................................................... 147 Sociology of Family .............................................................................................................. 114 Sociology of Family – Readers............................................................................................. 116 Sociology of Gender ............................................................................................................. 137 Sociology of Health – Readers ............................................................................................. 149 Sociology of Law – Readers................................................................................................. 146 Sociology of Sexuality – Readers......................................................................................... 151 Sociology of Sport ................................................................................................................ 147 Sociology of Women ............................................................................................................ 136 Special Topics ...................................................................................................................... 157 Special Topics – Readers ..................................................................................................... 158 SPSS / SAS.......................................................................................................................... 142 Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 142 Technology & Society ........................................................................................................... 155 Urban Sociology ................................................................................................................... 125
3
DEVELOPMENT OF CONTENT TABLEENGLISH
SOCIOLOGY
5
DEVELOPMENT INTRODUCTORY ENGLISH PSYCHOLOGY
Introductory Psychology .......................................................................................7 Introductory Psychology – Readers....................................................................16
NEW TITLES INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Psychology 10/11, 41e
Buskist
9780078050534
17
M Intro Psych
McGraw-Hill
9780078035234
7
Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior, 5e
Passer
9780073532127
7
Annual Editions: Psychology 09/10, 40e
Buskist
9780073516394
17
Psychology and Your Life
Feldman
9780077354732
8
Psychology: Making Connections
Feist
9780073531830
9
Experience Psychology
King
9780073405476
10
Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View Study Edition, The
King
9780073532141
11
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Psychological Issues, 16e
Slife
9780078139420
18
Psych 2.0 Online Experience Guide
Rahhal
9780077275884
16
Psychology for Nurses (Asian Pub)
Salgado
9789833850761
12
ISBN
Page
2010
2009
6
Introductory to Psychology
Introductory Psychology
CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Psychology 2. Neuroscience and Behavior 3. Sensation and Perception 4. Consciousness 5. Learning 6. Memory 7. Cognition, Language, and Intelligence 8. Motivation and Emotion 9. Lifespan Development 10. Personality 11. Stress, Coping, and Well-Being 12. Psychological Disorders and Their Treatments 13. Social Psychology
NEW
*9780078035234* M INTRO PSYCH McGraw-Hill 2011 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780078035234 Available: January 2010
www.mhhe.com/psychsmart1e2001 Are your students reading effectively?
NEW
Are your students performing as well as they hope and expect to in your course?
*9780073532127*
Meet PsychSmart from McGraw-Hill. PsychSmart is the newest member of the McGraw-Hill M Series family … and the M Series started with YOUR students.
PSYCHOLOGY: THE SCIENCE OF MIND AND BEHAVIOR 5th Edition
Through extensive student research, we have created a textbook and learning system designed to meet the needs and maximize the workflow habits of today’s college students. Students told us they wanted a briefer text with more visual appeal…and a less expensive price.
Michael W Passer and Ronald E Smith of University of Washington 2011 / 832 pages ISBN: 9780073532127 Available: July 2010
We listened.
[Details unavailable at press time]
We also listened to instructors. We learned about the challenges that they faced in their classrooms everyday and what their ideal course materials would look like. They told us they needed an engaging solution for their course needs – but without sacrificing quality and content. The result is PsychSmart. Authored by master teachers, PsychSmart uses a wealth of real world examples, media and online interactivities to create a dynamic and engaging learning solution designed to reach today’s students. FEATURES v Dynamic design format inspired by contemporary magazines to enhance student engagement in the text material. Stunning images, charts, and graphs throughout grab the reader’s attention and make serious scholarship enjoyable to read. v Intro Psych M Series is offered at a significant discount to traditional introductory psychology textbooks. v Pedagogy that works for students. Each chapter offers a wealth of usable and effective pedagogical tools from the beginning to the conclusion of each chapter, ensuring students read, understand, and learn the material. v Engaging features of high interest to today’s students. Recurring features in each chapter, such as Psych in the Media and Buy It?, speak directly to today’s generation of students showing them the connections between what they are reading and learning and what they are living. v Proven content quality. Based on the highly successful core of material from Bob Feldman’s other texts, this M Series title offers a tested and trusted presentation of the science of psychology.
7
Introductory to Psychology *9780077354732*
This feature includes scenarios such as how to evaluate advertising, and how to determine if one should seek counseling.
NEW
v Full Circle feature is an end-of-chapter map that identifies the correlation of the overarching chapter key concepts. Visual learners will benefit from the Chapter Maps which “tie everything together” by revisiting and reinforcing the key concepts for every module within each chapter.
International Edition
v PsychInteractive includes many activities and assessments, online and hands-on, that allow students to conduct experiments tied directly to the content. Free! See www.mhhe.com/feldmaness7 to preview the activities. Psychology and Your Life will map the activities to the modules in the text. PsychInteractive will be available with Psychology and Your Life upon publication. The PsychInteractive exercises can be completed alone or in class. They provide experiential, applied activities which are frequently described as “interesting and fun!” Great for students who prefer to “learn by doing”.
PSYCHOLOGY AND YOUR LIFE Robert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst
2010 / Softcover / 448 pages ISBN: 9780077354732 [MP] ISBN: 9780070167117 [IE] Available: January 2009
v Looking Forward/Looking Back feature introduces the key concepts of every chapter; Looking Back summarizes content from the chapter as a whole to reinforce the learning outcomes of each module. (For a visual representation of the Looking Back Feature, see the explanation of the Full Circle feature). Looking Forward introduces each chapter so students can examine the overarching chapter concepts. Looking Back provides them with an overall chapter summary, restating what they should have learned during their chapter review.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/psychlife This text also provides instructors with a fully-integrated supplements package to help instructors objectively gauge their students’ mastery of psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamic class experiences—whether in the classroom or online. All ancillary materials are organized by the measurable learning outcomes of each module within the text—there is no more wondering whether the text in use will meet the accreditation guidelines for schools! Emphasizing practical application, Psychology and Your Life offers examples and perspectives from the healthcare industry (including Allied Health), technology, criminal justice, legal, and business, among others to prepare students to readily prepare and apply psychology throughout their lives and careers.
v Key terms, definitions, and glossary. Key terms are easily identifiable (bolded and called out in the margins with definitions) within each module and are listed, with page references at the end of every module. The glossary includes enhanced definitions—additional explanations of difficult or confusing terms using synonyms or expanded parenthetical definitions—allowing students to expand their knowledge of the terminology associated with psychology. Providing the most clear, accessible definitions helps students recognize, identify, define, and describe the terminology and definitions. Enhancements to the glossary definitions are designed to provide extra support to students at a variety of reading levels and abilities.
FEATURES v “From the Perspective of” highlights how psychology impacts a variety of professions. Created to show the correlation between psychology and different professions, students learn to comprehend what psychology means to their chosen program of study and answers the “why does psychology matter to me” question. Whether students are in an Allied Health, Nursing, criminal justice, technology, business, or legal studies track, they will have the chance to make connections between their area of study and their lives after completing their program.
v Recap/Evaluate/Rethink end-of-module activities are tied directly to the module’s learning outcomes boosting students’ opportunities to apply and analyze their knowledge beyond the definitions or simple explanations. These activities allow instructors to move students from memorization to application and analysis in a cohesive, logical manner through a variety of activities and exercises tied to the learning outcomes of the module. Instructors who are familiar with Bloom’s Taxonomy or who want to provide activities for students with different learning styles will find a variety of exercises for homework or class discussion.
v Try It! Experiential self-assessment quizzes reinforce chapter concepts and enable students to consider, compare, and contrast their preferences, behaviors, and attitudes. Similar to the fun quizzes students may take online or in magazines, the Try It! boxes are self-assessment quizzes that tie directly to and reinforce the chapter concepts in a non-threatening (even fun!) manner. Active learning at its best!
v Case Studies, found at the end of each chapter, allow students to apply and analyze the chapter content and discuss what they have learned in the context of a story or situation. Students will analyze a situation through critical thinking, discussion, and interaction with other students whose perspectives may differ from their own.
v Study Alert study tips tied into chapter content promote positive learning behaviors within the context of psychology. Students can prepare and apply the learned skills in their current course. Provides additional information to help students understand tough or confusing concepts and provides guidance for what information will follow later in each chapter.
v Psychology on the Web consists of various web-based activities found at the end of every chapter to promote internet research of key chapter concepts. Great for active learning and increasing students’ abilities to conduct internet research and critique internet resources within the context of their psychology class!
v Exploring Diversity strategically placed within the modules address how diversity and perspective relate to the study of psychology. Exploring Diversity promotes critical thinking about psychology concepts through the discussion and assessment of cultural and ethnic differences in direct correlation to research, study, and our lives.
CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction to Psychology Module 1: Psychologists at Work Module 2: A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the Future Module 3: Research in Psychology Module 4: The Ethics of Research
v Becoming an Informed Consumer of Psychology—Psychology concepts are discussed in the context of the student as a consumer. These real-life scenarios enable students to consider and even implement psychological concepts within the world around them and apply critical thinking skills to their personal and professional lives.
8
Introductory to Psychology *9780073531830*
Chapter 2: Neuroscience and Behavior Module 5: Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior Module 6: The Nervous System and the Endocrine System: Communicating Within the Body Module 7: The Brain Chapter 3: Sensation and Perception Module 8: Sensing the World Around Us Module 9: Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye Module 10: Hearing and the Other Senses Module 11: Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the World Chapter 4: States of Consciousness Module 12: Sleep and Dreams Module 13: Hypnosis and Meditation Module 14: Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness Chapter 5: Learning Module 15: Classical Conditioning Module 16: Operant Conditioning Module 17: Cognitive Approaches to Learning Chapter 6: Thinking: Memory, Cognition, and Language Module 18: The Foundations of Memory Module 19: Recall and Forgetting Module 20: Thinking, Reasoning, and Problem Solving Module 21: Language Chapter 7: Motivation and Emotion Module 22: Explaining Motivation Module 23: Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be Daring Module 24: Understanding Emotional Experiences Chapter 8: Development Module 25: Nature and Nurture, and Prenatal Development Module 26: Infancy and Childhood Module 27: Adolescence: Becoming an Adult Module 28: Adulthood Chapter 9: Personality and Individual Differences Module 29: Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality Module 30: Trait, Learning, Biological and Evolutionary, and Humanistic Approaches to Personality Module 31: Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us Distinctive Module 32: Intelligence? Chapter 10: Psychological Disorders Module 33: Normal Versus Abnormal: Making a Distinction Module 34: The Major Psychological Disorders Module 35: Psychological Disorders in Perspective Chapter 11: Treatment of Psychological Disorders Module 36: Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and Cognitive Approaches to Treatment Module 37: Psychotherapy: Humanistic and Group Approaches to Treatment Module 38: Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to Treatment Chapter 12: Social Psychology Module 39: Attitudes and Social Cognition Module 40: Social Influence and Groups Module 41: Prejudice and Discrimination Module 42: Positive and Negative Social Behavior Module 43: Stress and Coping
NEW International Edition
PSYCHOLOGY: MAKING CONNECTIONS Gregory J Feist, San Jose State University Erika Rosenberg, University of California Davis
2010 / Hardcover / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073531830 ISBN: 9780071285339 [IE] Available: January 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/feist1e Connect with science. Connect with students. Connect with Feist and Rosenberg’s Psychology. In Psychology: Making Connections, Greg Feist and Erika Rosenberg provide the tools for students to make meaningful connections with the material encompassed in Introductory Psychology while still presenting psychology as a scientific endeavor. With its focus on connections, Feist helps your students to understand both the discipline and concepts of psychology as well as psychology’s relevance to their lives. Feist provides you with the science you are seeking while bringing it alive for your students in an accessible way. By challenging students to make connections between what they are reading and learning about in class and the world around them outside the classroom, Psychology: Making Connections fosters students’ critical thinking skills. At the same time, the authors consistently reinforce the idea that science is a process and not just a collection of resulting outcomes to be memorized. In doing so, they bring to life the names and experiments on the page and vividly illustrate the human element in the scientific method. FEATURES v Connecting nature and nurture. Feist and Rosenberg explore the interplay of nature and nurture throughout the text, breaking down any preconceived misconceptions students may have about a nature OR nurture dichotomy. This is accomplished in the narrative and in recurring marginal Nature/Nurture features. v Connecting psychologists and their scientific discoveries. “Breaking New Ground” sections in each chapter highlight breakthrough discoveries that have fundamentally altered the field of psychology. v Connecting key concepts within the chapter. Making Connections sections at the conclusion of each chapter reiterate the major ideas in the chapter and show how they can be applied to a common problem. v Connecting topics and subfields across chapters. “Connection” marginal features emphasize links among subdisciplines of psychology, reminding students that psychology is an integrated discipline and not a hodgepodge of topics thrown together. v Connecting Psychology with Student Experiences. In the narrative and in Psychology in the Real World features in each chapter, the authors consistently demonstrate the ways that psychology impacts students’ everyday lives. v Biological art inserts. Recognizing that biological concepts and structures are often some of the more difficult aspects for Introductory Psychology students to master, Feist and Rosenberg include transparency inserts in the text to foster better understanding of this material.
9
Introductory to Psychology CONTENTS
FEATURES
Preface Foreword by Paul Ekman 1 Introduction to Psychology 2 Conducting Psychological Research 3 Biological Foundations 4 Sensation and Perception 5 The Developing Human 6 Consciousness 7 Memory 8 Learning 9 Language and Thought 10 Intelligence, Problem-Solving, and Creativity 11 Motivation 12 Emotion 13 Stress, Coping, and Health 14 Personality and the Uniqueness of the Individual 15 Social Behavior 16 Psychological Disorders 17 Treatment of Psychological Disorders Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
v What is your experience with students’ completion or comprehension of the assigned reading? v Experience Psychology provides an adaptive questioning diagnostic that ensures students understand the key concepts in the chapter. Whether they use this dynamic resource before or after class (or doing the reading), your students will read more and more effectively. v With Experience Psychology, your students hear the story of the science of psychology from an engaging author who speaks to them personally and directly, actively drawing them into the reading. v How many students come to your course less than adequately prepared for the experience of a college psychology survey? v A recent survey of professors by the Chronicle of Higher Education showed that 84 percent believe their students are “unprepared’’ or only “somewhat prepared’’ to pursue a college degree. v The dynamic adaptive questioning diagnostic quickly shows students they are not likely to perform as well as they would like--or as previous performance might predict--if they are only “reading” the text to memorize key terms, facts, and people. Applied and conceptual items are included in this diagnostic system, along with purely factual questions to ensure students are prepared to perform to your expectations before the reckoning of the first big exam. At-aglance visual reporting allows you to quickly identify students who are struggling or even entire sections that might be lagging. v Laura King provides a variety of means within the text to ensure students are prepared to meet the demands of Introductory Psychology. Section previews prepare students for the reading ahead and section-ending Self-Quizzes give them an opportunity to check their understanding of key concepts. End-of-chapter Self-Tests serve a similar purpose. Marginal notes from the author alert students to pay additional attention to concepts students often find difficult or “tricky.” Biological art acetates are built into the text to help students in one of the typically difficult areas by allowing them to build from basic to more complex structures.
*9780073405476* NEW International Edition EXPERIENCE PSYCHOLOGY Laura A King, University of Missouri-Columbia 2010 / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073405476 ISBN: 9780070172500 [IE] Available: October 2009
v How has the experience of teaching introductory psychology changed over the past 5-10 years? What are you doing differently to address the changing nature of students as well as changes in personnel, technology, etc.?
http://www.mhhe.com/kingep
v Through thousands of hours of research with you and your students, we have identified some consistent trends that are nearly universal. At the top of the list, clearly time is at a premium as faculty are stretched thinner and asked to do more with less. Experience Psychology is ideal for this environment as its flexibility allows instructors to use as little or as much (or none) of the digital component as they choose. Turnkey course setups are available almost immediately, or the course can be customized at virtually any level of granularity. This makes Experience Psychology perfect for face-to-face, online, or hybrid course delivery.
Do you want your students to just take psychology or to experience psychology? Experience Psychology is a first. Its groundbreaking adaptive questioning diagnostic and personalized study plan help students “know what they know” while guiding them to experience and learn what they don’t know through engaging interactivities, exercises, and readings. After all, to truly understand psychology and all its wonders, one must experience it firsthand. And, luckily, there are so many natural opportunities to do so. Psychology is all around us—in our relationships, our homes, our communities, our schools, and our work. But linking everyday experiences to the academic discipline of Psychology is not always so easy. Laura King’s Experience Psychology was built to do just that. Experience Psychology introduces function before dysfunction, building student awareness and understanding by looking first at typical, everyday behavior before delving into the less common—and likely less personally experienced—rare and abnormal. Experience Psychology places the science of psychology and the research that helps students see the academic underpinnings at the forefront of the course and at the same time offers an abundance of applications that helps students connect the science of psychology to the world around them. At the same time, “Intersections” ensure students experience psychology as the interconnected discipline it is. Experience Psychology helps students to perform to their maximum potential in and out of the classroom, fully engaging them in the content and experiences that comprise the world’s most popular undergraduate major.
v Experience Psychology’s recurring features such as Challenge Your Thinking, Intersection, and Do It! exercises complement the on-line tools by encouraging active engagement with the assigned reading as well as critical thinking. Their inclusion in the text means less time spent by you looking for current debates in psychological research for discussion and development of critical thinking skills (Challenge Your Thinking), connections between subfields that show students psychology is interconnected and not a series of unrelated topics or chapters (Intersection), and hands-on exercises students can do in and out of the classroom to apply the science of psychology (Do It!).
10
Introductory to Psychology v Integrated supplements development. The text author, Laura King, and all of the supplement authors met before the writing of the ancillaries to accompany the text to ensure a true integration of book and supporting material. After meeting initially, the team continued to communicate with one another and the author to ensure the highest quality and consistency.
CONTENTS Chapter 1--The Science of Psychology Chapter 2--The Brain and Behavior Chapter 3--Sensation and Perception Chapter 4--States of Consciousness Chapter 5--Learning Chapter 6--Memory Chapter 7--Thinking, Intelligence, and Language Chapter 8--Human Development Chapter 9--Motivation Chapter 10--Personality Chapter 11--Social Psychology Chapter 12--Psychological Disorders Chapter 13--Therapies Chapter 14--Health Psychology
v Up-to-date research and coverage. Psychology is a vigorous young science, and knowledge changes quickly. The Science of Psychology features the most current research interwoven with classic findings to give students a sense of this vitality. v Multiple choice practice questions. At the end of each major section within chapters, at the end of every chapter, and in a new Appendix, The Science of Psychology offers numerous opportunities for students to assess their comprehension of key concepts. CONTENTS Chapter 1 What Is Psychology? Defining Psychology Chapter 2 Psychology’s Scientific Methods Chapter 3 Biological Foundations of Behavior Chapter 4 Human Development Chapter 5 Sensation and Perception Chapter 6 States of Consciousness Chapter 7 Learning Chapter 8 Memory Chapter 9 Thinking, Language, and Intelligence Chapter 10 Motivation and Emotion Chapter 11 Personality Chapter 12 Social Psychology Chapter 13 Psychological Disorders Chapter 14 Therapies Chapter 15 Health Psychology Appendix A: Practice Mid-term and Final Exams Appendix B: Answers to the Assess Your Knowledge Chapter Quizzes and the Practice Mid-term and Final Exams
NEW
*9780073532141* THE SCIENCE OF PSYCHOLOGY An Appreciative View Study Edition Laura A King, University of Missouri-Columbia 2010 / 816 pages ISBN: 9780073532141 Available: January 2009
www.mhhe.com/king1 Why Things Go Right. The Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View Study Edition by Laura King (University of Missouri at Columbia) is the first text to bring a truly appreciative view of psychology-as a science and for exploring behavior-to introductory students. It is built around the idea that students must study the discipline of psychology as a whole, that the sub-disciplines are intricately connected, and that human behavior is best understood by exploring its functioning state in addition to its potential dysfunctions. In this new Study Edition, Laura King maintains her extremely popular blend of contemporary research and writing that maximizes students’ interest. This edition offers multiple choice review questions throughout each chapter as well as practice quizzes and exams. FEATURES v Psychology as an integrated whole. Presents psychology as an integrated field in which many specialized subfields overlap and where research findings in one subfield support important studies and exciting discoveries in another. v Function before dysfunction. The Science of Psychology begins with the premise that we need to explore functional behavior in its own right and as a context for abnormal behavior. In other words, we need to study why things go right before studying why things go wrong. v Innovative Biological Art Program. The Science of Psychology has an innovative art program that includes transparency inserts – bound into the text - on the brain and nervous system as well as the senses. These unique eye-opening visuals are just one more way that the text works to engage and inform students. v Health and Wellness. Illustrates the relevance of psychology to students by focusing on the implications of the material covered for their own health and wellness.
11
Introductory to Psychology Module 6 The Nervous System and the Endocrine System: Communicating Within the Body Module 7 The Brain Chapter 3 Sensation and Perception Module 8 Sensing the World Around Us Module 9 Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye Module 10 Hearing and the Other Senses Module 11 Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the World Chapter 4 States of Consciousness Module 12 Sleep and Dreams Module 13 Hypnosis and Meditation Module 14 Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness Chapter 5 Learning Module 15 Classical Conditioning Module 16 Operant Conditioning Module 17 Cognitive Approaches to Learning Chapter 6 Memory Module 18 The Foundations of Memory Module 19 Recalling Long-Term Memories Module 20 Forgetting: When Memory Fails Chapter 7 Thinking, Language, and Intelligence Module 21 Thinking and Reasoning Module 22 Language Module 23 Intelligence Chapter 8 Motivation and Emotion Module 24 Explaining Motivation Module 25 Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be Daring Module 26 Understanding Emotional Experiences Chapter 9 Development Module 27 Nature and Nurture and Prenatal Development Module 28 Infancy and Childhood Module 29 Adolescence: Becoming an Adult Module 30 Adulthood Chapter 10 Personality Module 31 Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality Module 32 Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and Humanistic Approaches to Personality Module 33 Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us Distinctive Chapter 11 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-Being Module 34 Stress and Coping Module 35 Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-Being Module 36 Promoting Health and Wellness Chapter 12 Psychological Disorders Module 37 Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the Distinction Module 38 The Major Psychological Disorders Module 39 Psychological Disorders in Perspective Chapter 13 Treatment of Psychological Disorders Module 40 Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and Cognitive Approaches to Treatment Module 41 Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and Group Approaches to Treatment Module 42 Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to Treatment Chapter 14 Social Psychology Module 43 Attitudes and Social Cognition Module 44 Social Influence Module 45 Prejudice and Discrimination Module 46 Positive and Negative Social Behavior Glossary G-1 References R-1 Credits C-1 Name Index I-1 Subject Index I-15
NEW
*9789833850761* PSYCHOLOGY FOR NURSES Arnel Banaga Salgado, UCSI University-Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia 2009 / 188 pages ISBN: 9789833850761 Available: June 2009
[An Asian Publication] A comprehensive book written for those taking diploma and degree programmes in nursing. It is also for the registered nurses (RN) who would like to enrich their nursing practice. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Psychology for Nurses Chapter 2: Psychology, Human Behavior, and Nursing Practice Chapter 3: Human Development Chapter 4: The Biological and Physiological Basis of Behavior Chapter 5: Sensation and Perception Chapter 6: Consciousness, Sleep, and Awareness Chapter 7: Theories of Personality Chapter 8: Intelligence, Learning, and Cognitive Psychology Chapter 9: Motivation Chapter 10: Emotions Chapter 11: Stress, Conflict, and Coping Mechanisms Chapter 12: The Psychology of Social Behavior C h a p t e r 1 3 : P s y c h o l o g i c a l A s s e s s m e n t a n d Te s t i n g (Psychometrics)
International Edition ESSENTIALS OF UNDERSTANDING PSYCHOLOGY 8th Edition Robert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst 2009 / Softcover / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073370200 ISBN: 9780071285346 [IE] Available: October 2008 Students First. Bob Feldman’s Essentials of Understanding Psychology guides students through Introductory Psychology concepts in an accessible manner, bringing comprehension of difficult material into the grasp of all students — because when students understand psychology, they learn psychology. The thoroughly revised Eighth Edition integrates a variety of elements that foster students’ understanding of psychology and its impact on their everyday lives, including a new Neuroscience and Life feature, alerts to key topics, and study skills for specific concepts. This text also provides instructors with a fully integrated supplements package to objectively gauge their students’ mastery of psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamic lectures. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction to Psychology Module 1 Psychologists at Work Module 2 A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the Future Module 3 Psychology’s Key Issues and Controversies Module 4 Research Challenges Chapter 2 Neuroscience and Behavior Module 5 Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior
12
Introductory to Psychology Chapter 10 Motivation and Emotion Module 29 Explaining Motivation Module 30 Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be Daring Module 31 Understanding Emotional Experiences Chapter 11 Sexuality and Gender Module 32 Gender and Sex Module 33 Understanding Human Sexual Response: The Facts of Life Module 34 The Diversity of Sexual Behavior Chapter 12 Development Module 35 Nature and Nurture: The Enduring Developmental Issue/ Module 36 Prenatal Development: Conception to Birth Module 37 Infancy and Childhood Module 38 Adolescence: Becoming an Adult Module 39 Adulthood Chapter 13 Personality Module 40 Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality Module 41 Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and Humanistic Approaches to Personality Module 42 Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us Distinctive Chapter 14 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-Being Module 43 Stress and Coping Module 44 Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-Being Module 45 Promoting Health and Wellness Chapter 15 Psychological Disorders Module 46 Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the Distinction Module 47 The Major Psychological Disorders Module 48 Psychological Disorders in Perspective Chapter 16 Treatment of Psychological Disorders Module 49Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and Cognitive Approaches to Treatment Module 50 Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and Group Approaches to Treatment Module 51iomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to Treatment Chapter 17 Social Psychology Module 52 Attitudes and Social Cognition Module 53 Social Influence Module 54 Prejudice and Discrimination Module 55 Positive and Negative Social Behavior Appendix Going by the Numbers: Statistics in Psychology A-1 Module 56 Descriptive Statistics A-3 Module 57 Measures of Variability A-7 Module 58 Using Statistics to Answer Questions: Inferential Statistics and Correlation A-11 Glossary G-1 References R-1 Credits C-1 Name Index I-1 Subject Index I-15
International Edition UNDERSTANDING PSYCHOLOGY 9th Edition Robert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst 2009 / Hardcover / 784 pages ISBN: 9780073370194 ISBN: 9780071285353 [IE] Available: October 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/feldmanup9e Students First. Bob Feldman’s Understanding Psychology guides students through Introductory Psychology concepts in an accessible manner, bringing comprehension of difficult material into the grasp of all students — because when students understand psychology, they learn psychology. The thoroughly revised Ninth Edition integrates a variety of elements that foster students’ understanding of psychology and its impact on their everyday lives, including a new Neuroscience In Your Life feature, alerts to key topics, and study skills for specific concepts. This text also provides instructors with a fully integrated supplements package to objectively gauge their students’ mastery of psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamic lectures. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction to Psychology Module 1 Psychologists at Work Module 2 A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the Future Module 3 Psychology’s Key Issues and Controversies Chapter 2 Psychological Research Module 4 The Scientific Method Module 5 Conducting Psychological Research Module 6 Critical Research Issues Chapter 3 Neuroscience and Behavior Module 7 Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior Module 8 The Nervous System and the Endocrine System: Communicating Within the Body Module 9 The Brain Chapter 4 Sensation and Perception Module 10 Sensing the World Around Us Module 11 Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye Module 12 Hearing and the Other Senses Module 13 Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the World Chapter 5 States of Consciousness Module 14 Sleep and Dreams Module 15 Hypnosis and Meditation Module 16 Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness Chapter 6 Learning Module 17 Classical Conditioning Module 18 Operant Conditioning Module 19 Cognitive Approaches to Learning Chapter 7 Memory Module 20 The Foundations of Memory Module 21 Recalling Long-Term Memories Module 22 Forgetting: When Memory Fails Chapter 8 Cognition and Language Module 23 Thinking and Reasoning Module 24 Problem Solving Module 25 Language Chapter 9 Intelligence Module 26 What Is Intelligence? Module 27 Variations in Intellectual Ability Module 28 Group Differences in Intelligence: Genetic and Environmental Determinants
13
Introductory to Psychology International Edition
International Edition PSYCHOLOGY: THE SCIENCE OF MIND AND BEHAVIOR 4th Edition
PSYCHOLOGY: AN INTRODUCTION 10th Edition Benjamin B Lahey, University of Chicago 2009 / Softcover / 752 pages ISBN: 9780073531984 ISBN: 9780071280006 [IE] Available: July 2008
Michael W. Passer, University of Washington Ronald E. Smith, University of Washington 2009 / 800 pages ISBN: 9780073382760 ISBN: 9780071270861 [IE] Available: October 2007
http://www.mhhe.com/lahey10e A contemporary take on a time tested classic. Students will master the central concepts of psychology with the new 10th edition of Psychology from Benjamin Lahey. A new chapter on the Interplay of Nature and Nurture highlights the 10th edition’s new organization and streamlined content . Lahey weaves scholarship based on empirical research throughout the text, ensuring an accurate portrait of contemporary psychology. The text’s student-friendly writing, new chapter openers, and fresh applications make the material more relevant to students than ever before, and the proven learning system ensures that all students will grasp the concepts presented in the book. Lahey’s hallmark emphasis on diversity and culture remains integrated throughout the text, making this the text for a well rounded introduction to all areas of psychology.
www.mhhe.com/passer4 Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior imparts students with a scientific understanding of the field of psychology while showing them the impact on their day-to-day existence. A simple conceptual framework within the text emphasizes relations between biological, psychological, and environmental levels of analysis and portrays the focus of modern psychology. Together with Research Close-Ups in each chapter and Beneath the Surface discussions and What Do You Think? questions, the text challenges students to think critically about psychology as a science and its impact on their lives. CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Science of Psychology Chapter 2 Studying Behavior Scientifically Chapter 3 Genes, Environment, and Behavior Chapter 4 The Brain and Behavior Chapter 5 Sensation and Perception Chapter 6 States of Consciousness Chapter 7 Learning and Adaptation: The Role of Experience Chapter 8 Memory Chapter 9 Language and Thinking Chapter 10 Intelligence Chapter 11 Motivation and Emotion Chapter 12 Development over the Life Span Chapter 13 Personality Chapter 14 Adjusting to Life: Stress, Coping, and Health Chapter 15 Psychological Disorders Chapter 16 Treatment of Psychological Disorders Chapter 17 Social Thinking and Behavior Appendix: Statistics in Psychology A-1
CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction And Foundations Chapter 1: Introduction to Psychology Chapter 2: Research Methods in Psychology Chapter 3: Biological Foundations in Behavior Chapter 4: The Interplay of Nature and Nurture Part 2: Awareness Chapter 5: Sensation and Perception Chapter 6: States of Consciousness Part 3: Learning And Cognition Chapter 7: Basic Principles of Learning Chapter 8: Memory Chapter 9: Cognition, Language, and Intelligence Part 4: Developmental Psychology Chapter 10: Developmental Psychology Part 5: The Self Chapter 11: Motivation and Emotion Chapter 12: Personality Theories and Assessment Part 6: Health and Adjustment Chapter 13: Stress and Health Chapter 14: Abnormal Behavior Chapter 15: Therapies Part 7: Social Context Chapter 16: Social Psychology Chapter 17: Psychology Applied to Business and other Professions
14
Introductory to Psychology International Edition
International Edition
THE SCIENCE OF PSYCHOLOGY AN APPRECIATIVE VIEW
ESSENTIALS OF PSYCHOLOGY WITH MAKING THE GRADE CD-ROM
Laura King, University of Missouri--Columbia 2008 / 864 pages ISBN: 9780073531885 ISBN: 9780071284035 [IE] Available: November 2007
Website: www.mhhe.com/laheye1
Benjamin B. Lahey, University of Chicago 2002 / Softcover / 471 pages ISBN: 978072487626 ISBN: 9780071121200 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/king1
CONTENTS Ch 1 - What is Psychology? Ch 2 - Biological Foundations of Behavior Ch 3 - Sensation and Perception Ch 4 - States of Consciousness Ch 5 - Basic Principles of Learning Ch 6 - Memory Ch 7 - Cognition, Language, and Intelligence Ch 8 - Developmental Psychology Ch 9 - Motivation and Emotion Ch 10 - Gender Ch 11 - Personality Theories and Assessment Ch 12 - Stress and Health Ch 13 - Abnormal Behavior Ch 14 - Therapies Ch 15 - Social Psychology Appendix: Measurement, Research Design, and Statistics
Why Things Go Right. The Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View by Laura King (University of Missouri at Columbia) is the first text to bring a truly appreciative view of psychology—as a science and for exploring behavior—to introductory students. It is built around the idea that students must study the discipline of psychology as a whole, that the sub-disciplines are intricately connected, and that human behavior is best understood by exploring its functioning state in addition to its potential dysfunctions. For example, imagine that you have been asked to create a science of “watchology.” You have two watches that both have had the unfortunate “trauma” of being left in the pocket of someone’s jeans through the washer and dryer. One watch has suffered the worst possible fate—it no longer tells time. The other has emerged from the traumatic event still ticking. Which watch would you use to develop your new science of watchology? Clearly, the working watch will help you understand watches better than the broken one. What does watchology have to do with psychology? Quite simply, in psychology as in watchology, it makes sense to start with what works: to gain a general understanding of human behavior and then apply that knowledge to those who have emerged from life’s experiences in dysfunction. CONTENTS Chapter 1 What Is Psychology? Defining Psychology Chapter 2 Psychology’s Scientific Methods Chapter 3 Biological Foundations of Behavior Chapter 4 Human Development Chapter 5 Sensation and Perception Chapter 6 States of Consciousness Chapter 7 Learning Chapter 8 Memory Chapter 9 Thinking, Language, and Intelligence Chapter 10 Motivation and Emotion Chapter 11 Personality Chapter 12 Social Psychology Chapter 13 Industrial and Organizational Psychology Chapter 14 Psychological Disorders Chapter 15 Therapies Chapter 16 Health Psychology
15
Introductory to Psychology
Introductory Psychology – Readers
Levels of Processing: Transferring Information from Short Term Memory to Long Term Memory Eyewitness Fallibility: Witnessing a Crime Eyewitness Fallibility: Focusing Attention* Alzheimer’s Disease Language, Cognition, and Intelligence Thinking and Reasoning: Centenarians* Heuristics Gardner’s Theory of Multiple Intelligences IQ Tests: Are they accurate measures of intelligence?* Group Differences in IQ* Mental Retardation: Down Syndrome* Language Development* Motivation and Emotion The Need for Achievement Emotion: Language of the Face* Emotion: Body Language* Detection of Deception Sexuality and Gender Gender Stereotypes: Implicit Associations Test Sexual Response: Masters and Johnson* Sex and Medicine: Sex, Sin, and Sickness* Sex and Medicine: Alfred Kinsey* Biological Aspects of Sexuality: Sexual Identity* Adolescence: Sexual Identity* Sexual Response: Viagra* Science of Sexuality: Evolutionary Psychology & Mate Selection* Adulthood: Interracial Relationships* Development Nature and Nurture Genes and Behavior: Twin Studies* Infant Vision: Seeing Through the Eyes of a Child* Cognitive Development: Categorization* Conservation Stages of Moral Development Adolescence: Adolescent Development* Suicide Risk Factors Personality Defense Mechanisms Your Ideal Self Trait Theory of Personality* Personality Assessment Health Psychology College Stress Test Type A Behavior Abnormal Psychology, Therapy and Treatment Distinguishing Abnormality: A Continuum Approach* Understanding the DSM Depression* Bipolar Disorder Phobia Anxiety Disorder* Schizophrenia Historical Perspectives: Treatment of Schizophrenia* Substance Abuse* Eating Disorders* Borderline Personality Disorder Systematic Desensitization Compare and Contrast Approaches to Therapy Social Psychology Fundamental Attribution Error Prejudice Social Cognition: Stereotype Threat* Asch’s Conformity Study* Milgram’s Obedience Study* The Stanford Prison Study: How Power Corrupts* First Impressions and Attraction Social Neuroscience: Using fMRI to Study Morality*
NEW
*9780077275884* PSYCH 2.0 ONLINE EXPERIENCE GUIDE Tamara A Rahhal, University of Mass-Amherst 2009 (June 2008) ISBN: 9780077275884
http://www.mhhe.com/psych2 Psych 2.0: It’s what you need. Are you looking for a solution for online or hybrid courses? A set of engaging content-based activities to reinforce the foundational concepts in your lectures and reading assignments? Want to integrate or upgrade a lab, recitation section, or more course activities? If you answered yes to one or more of these questions, Psych 2.0 is for you. CONTENTS Student Activities in Psych 2.0 New activities are marked with *. The instructor site includes all student content, plus related instructional material. Psychological Perspectives Multiple Causes of Behavior Five Perspectives in Psychology Subfields and Careers* Science and Methodology The Scientific Method Naturalistic Observation Self-Report Bias in Surveys Correlation Designing an Experiment: Dependent and Independent Variables* Ethical Dilemmas The Brain and Behavior The Structure of Neurons Areas and Functions of the Brain Brain Lateralization Localization of Function: 2nd Language Learning and Brain Plasticity* Sensation and Perception Weber’s Law How Do We See? Basic Sensory Processes* Perception: Integrating the Senses* Top-down v Bottom-up processing* Depth Perception Visual Illusions* States of Consciousness REM Sleep: Thinking* REM Sleep: Dreaming* Drug Effects Hypnosis* Learning Classical Conditioning: Pavlov’s Dogs Classical Conditioning and Advertising* Operant Conditioning: Teaching a Dog New Tricks Reinforcement and Punishment* Shaping Schedules of Reinforcement* Observational Learning: Monkey See, Monkey Do* Memory Sensory Memory Working Memory: Decay v Interference Working Memory: Putting Memory to Work* Long Term Memory
16
Introductory to Psychology
NEW
NEW
*9780078050534*
*9780073516394*
ANNUAL EDITIONS: PSYCHOLOGY 10/11 41st Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS: PSYCHOLOGY 09/10 40th Edition
William Buskist, Auburn University 2011 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078050534 Available: January 2010
William Buskist, Auburn University
Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
2010 / Softcover / 208 pages ISBN: 9780073516394 Available: January 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516392.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309162) v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Psychology_0910. pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Psychology 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in three of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Lahey and Feldman. CONTENTS UNIT 1: The Science of Psychology 1. Why Study Psychology?. 2. Does Psychology Make a Significant Difference in Our Lives? 3. The 10 Commandments of Helping Students Distinguish Science from Pseudoscience in Psychology 4. Science vs. Idealogy: Rebecca A. Clay UNIT 2: Biological Bases of Behavior 5. The Amazing Brain, Richard Restak 6. The Threatened Brain 7. Phantom Pain and the Brain 8. The Home Team Advantage … and Other Sex Hormone Secrets UNIT 3: Perceptual Processes 9. Extreme States 10. A Matter of Taste 11. What Dreams Are Made Of 12. About Face UNIT 4: Learning and Remembering 13. Conversing with Copycats 14. Move Over, Mice 15. The Perils and Promises of Praise UNIT 5: Cognitive Processes 16. What Was I Thinking?
17
Introductory to Psychology 17. The Culture-Cognition Connection 18. Talk to the Hand: New Insights into the Evolution of Language and Gesture UNIT 6: Emotion and Motivation 19. The Success Delusion 20. Feeling Smart: The Science of Emotional Intelligence 21. Ambition: Why Some People Are Most Likely to Succeed 22. Eating into the Nation’s Obesity Epidemic 23. A Nurturing Relationship: Mothers as Eating Role Models for their Daughters 24. All the Rage: Why Everyone is so Angry and Why We Must Calm Down UNIT 7: Development 25. A Learning Machine 26. The Joke’s in You, Michael Price 27. A Question of Resilience 28. Growing Up Online 29. Making Relationships Work: A Conversation with Psychologist 30. Blessed Are Those Who Mourn—and Those Who Comfort Them UNIT 8: Personality Processes 31. Culture and the Development of Self-Knowledge 32. Frisky, but More Risky 33. Second Nature UNIT 9: Social Processes 34. Bad Apples or Bad Barrels? 35. Young and Restless 36. We’re Wired to Connect UNIT 10: Psychological Disorders 37. A New Approach to Attention Deficit Disorder 38. Treating War’s Toll on the Mind 39. Soldier Support 40. We Love to be Scared on Halloween UNIT 11: Psychological Treatments 41. Couple Therapy 42. `A Struggle for Hope,’ 43. PTSD Treatments Grow in Evidence, Effectiveness 44. When Do Meds Make the Difference? Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078139420* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES 16th Edition Brent Slife, Brigham Young University-Provo 2010 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780078139420 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078139422.mhtml Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource. CONTENTS Unit 1 Research Issues Issue 1. Are Traditional Empirical Methods Sufficient to Provide Evidence for Psychological Practice? Issue 2. Classic Dialogue: Was Stanley Milgram’s Study of Obedience Unethical? Issue 3. Does the Research Support Evolutionary Accounts of Female Mating Preferences? Unit 2 Biological Issues Issue 4. Must Women and Men Communicate Differently? Issue 5. Is Homosexuality Biologically Based? Issue 6. Is Evolution a Good Explanation for Psychological Concepts? Unit 3 Human Development Issue 7. Does Divorce Have Positive Long-term Effects on the Children Involved? Issue 8. Do Online Friendships Hurt Adolescent Development? Issue 9. Are Today’s Youth More Self-Centered than Previous Generations? Unit 4 Cognitive Processes Issue 10. Is the Theory of Multiple Intelligences Valid? Issue 11. Are Recovered Memories of Psychological Trauma Valid? Unit 5 Mental Health and Treatment Issue 12. Does ADHD a Real Disorder? Issue 13. Does Taking Antidepressants Lead to Suicide? Issue 14. Do Brain Deficiencies Determine Learning Disabilities? Unit 6 Social Psychology Issue 15. Should Psychologists Abstain from Involvement in Coercive Interrogations Issue 16. Do Video Games Lead to Violence? Issue 17. Can Sex Be Addictive?
18
19
DEVELOPMENT PSYCHOLOGY DEVELOPMENTAL ENGLISH
Adolescence – Reader / Cases ..........................................................................34 Adolescence – Texts...........................................................................................32 Adulthood and Aging ..........................................................................................35 Adulthood and Aging – Readers .........................................................................36 Child Development – Chronological ...................................................................27 Child Development – Topical ..............................................................................29 Child Development – Readers / Cases ..............................................................30 Child, Family & Society.......................................................................................31 Developmental Psychopathology .......................................................................39 Gender Role Development .................................................................................40 Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ...............................................21 Human Development / Lifespan – Topical ..........................................................24 Human Development / Lifespan – Readers........................................................25
NEW TITLES DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Aging 10/11, 23e
Cox
9780078050596
36
Annual Editions: Human Development 10/11, 39e
Freiberg
9780078050626
25
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Lifespan Development, 3e
Guest
9780078049958
25
Adolescence, 9e
Steinberg
9780073532035
32
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 5e
White
9780078049941
40
Annual Editions: Aging 09/10, 22e
Cox
9780078127731
37
Taking Sides: ClashIng Views in Childhood and Society, 8e
Del Campo
9780078127571
30, 31
Annual Editions: Dying, Dealth, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e
Dickinson
9780078127670
38
Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update), 38e
Freiberg
9780078127779
25
Annual Editions: The Family 10/11, 36e
Gilbert
9780078135880
31
Annual Editions: Gender 10/11
Hutchison
9780078050527
40
Annual Editions: Child Growth and Development, 17e
Junn
9780078127847
30
Adolescence, 13e
Santrock
9780073370675
32
Children, 11e
Santrock
9780073532004
27
Topical Approach to Lifespan Development, A, 5e
Santrock
9780073370934
24
Annual Editions: Adolescence Psychology, 7e
Stickle
9780078127755
34
ISBN
Page
2010
20
Developmental Psychology
Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological
International Edition HUMAN DEVELOPMENT ACROSS THE LIFESPAN 7th Edition
International Edition
John S Dacey and John Travers of Boston College 2009 / Softcover / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073382654 ISBN: 9780071270762 [IE] Available: April 2008
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 9th Edition Thomas L Candell and Corinne Haines Crandell of Broome Community College James W Vander Zanden, Ohio State University 2009 / Softcover / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073370422 ISBN: 9780071285308 [IE] Available: October 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/dacey7 All of the lifespan without all of the bells and whistles. This chronologically-organized text is less expensive and briefer than most Lifespan texts. Its numerous examples drawn from education, nursing, and psychology make the content relevant to students from a variety of majors and backgrounds, while a highly praised study guide integrated into the text promotes and reinforces conceptual understanding.
http://www.mhhe.com/crandell9e This long-trusted text features an interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, and contextual perspective on development. Applications to psychology, health care, social work, education, and family dynamics make this a perfect book for classes with a mixed population of majors. Continuing the hallmark diversity coverage of the prior eight editions, Crandell et al once again do an incomparable job examining populations at risk and explaining how they experience development and why their experience is different. With more than 1200 new references, the 9th edition has been updated throughout to reflect the latest information available in human development.\
CONTENTS Part 1 Introduction Chapter 1 An Example of Development Through The Lifespan Chapter 2 The Psychoanalytic Tradition Part 2 Beginnings Chapter 3 The Fertilization Process Chapter 4 The Prenatal World Part 3 Infancy Chapter 5 Physical Development In Infancy Chapter 6 The Meaning of Relationships Part 4 Early Childhood Chapter 7 Physical and Motor Development Chapter 8 The Family in Development Part 5 Middle Childhood Chapter 9 Physical Development Chapter 10 The Changing Sense of Self Part 6 Adolescence Chapter 11 Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence Chapter 12 Psychosocial Development in Adolescence Part 7 Early Adulthood Chapter 13 Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Adulthood Chapter 14 Psychosocial Development in Early Adulthood Part 8 Middle Adulthood Chapter 15 Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Adulthood Chapter 16 Psychosocial Development in Middle Adulthood Part 9 Late Adulthood Chapter 17 Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood Chapter 18 Psychosocial Development in Late Adulthood Chapter 19 Dying and Spirituality
CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Theories of Development Chapter 3 Reproduction, Heredity, and Prenatal Development Chapter 4 Birth and Physical Development Chapter 5 Infancy : Cognitive and Language Development Chapter 6 Infancy : The Development of Emotional and Social Bonds Chapter 7 Early Childhood: Physical and Cognitive Development Chapter 8 Early Childhood: Emotional and Social Development Chapter 9 Middle Childhood: Physical and Cognitive Development Chapter 10 Middle Childhood: Emotional and Social Development Chapter 11 Adolescence: Physical and Cognitive Development Chapter 12 Adolescence: Emotional and Social Development Chapter 13 Early Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development Chapter 14 Early Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development Chapter 15 Middle Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development Chapter 16 Middle Adulthood : Emotional and Social Development Chapter 17 Late Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development Chapter 18 Late Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development Chapter 19 Dying and Death
21
Developmental Psychology International Edition
International Edition
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 11th Edition
LIFE-SPAN DEVELOPMENT 12th Edition
Diane E Papalia Sally Wendkos Olds Ruth Duskin Feldman 2009 / Hardcover / 832 pages ISBN: 9780073370163 ISBN: 9780071280747 [IE] Available: October 2008
John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas 2009 / Softcover / 832 pages ISBN: 9780073370217 ISBN: 9780071280839 [IE] Available: October 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/papaliahd11e
Driven by learning goals, previous editions of this text have been widely adopted for their accurate, complete, and up-to-date coverage. While maintaining these hallmarks, this revision includes increased coverage of adulthood and aging, a new “Interlude” feature on applications, and updated research with more 21st-century citations than ever before.
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockld12
The 11th edition of this classic best-seller retains the extensive and integrated cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the proven Guidepost-Checkpoint learning system, and the balance between research and real-life applications that have made this text a long time favorite of students and faculty. In the warmly-written and engaging style that is their hallmark, Papalia, Olds, and Feldman once again paint an engaging chronological portrayal of development through the lifespan. This new edition features enhanced treatment of brain development and evolutionary psychology research as well as new Research in Action features highlighting interesting and timely topics.
CONTENTS Preface Section One--The Life-Span Developmental Perspective Chapter 1. Introduction Appendix .Careers in Life-Span Development Section Two--Beginning Chapter 2. Biological Beginnings Chapter 3. Prenatal Development and Birth Section Three--Infancy Chapter 4. Physical Development in Infancy Chapter 5. Cognitive Development in Infancy Chapter 6. Socioemotional Development in Infancy Section Four--Early Childhood Chapter 7. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood Chapter 8. Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood Section Five--Middle and Late Childhood Chapter 9. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and Late Childhood Chapter 10. Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late Childhood Section Six--Adolescence Chapter 11. Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence Chapter 12. Socioemotional Development in Adolescence Section Seven--Early Adulthood Chapter 13. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood Chapter 14. Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood Section Eight--Middle Adulthood Chapter 15. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Adulthood Chapter 16. Socioemotional Development in Middle Adulthood Section Nine--Late Adulthood Chapter 17. Physical Development in Late Adulthood Chapter 18. Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood Chapter 19. Socioemotional Development in Late Adulthood Section Ten--Endings Chapter 20. Death, Dying and Grieving
CONTENTS Part 1 About Human Development Chapter 1: The Study of Human Development Chapter 2: Theory and Research Part 2 Beginnings Chapter 3: Forming a New Life Chapter 4: Birth and Physical Development During the First Three Years Chapter 5: Cognitive Development during the First Three Years Chapter 6: Psychosocial Development during the First Three Years Part 3 Early Childhood Chapter Seven: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood Chapter 8: Psychosocial Development in Early Childhood Part 4 Middle Childhood Chapter 9: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood Chapter 10: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood Part 5 Adolescence Chapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence Chapter 12: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence Part 6 Young Adulthood Chapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Emerging and Young Adulthood Chapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Emerging and Young Adulthood Part 7 Middle Adulthood Chapter 15: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Adulthood Chapter 16: Psychosocial Development in Middle Adulthood Part 8 Late Adulthood Chapter 17: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood Chapter 18: Psychosocial Development in Late Adulthood Part 9 The End of Life Chapter 19: Dealing with Death and Bereavement
22
Developmental Psychology Chapter 10: Socioemotional Development in Adolescence The Self and Emotional Development Families Peers Culture and Adolescent Development Adolescent Problems Chapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Adulthood The Transition from Adolescence to Adulthood Physical Development Sexuality Cognitive Development Careers and Work Chapter 12: Socioemotional Development in Early Adulthood Stability and Change from Childhood to Adulthood Attraction, Love, and Close Relationships Adult Life Styles Marriage and the Family Gender, Relationships, and Self Development Chapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Adulthood The Nature of Middle Adulthood Physical Development Cognitive Development Careers, Work, and Leisure Religion and Meaning in Life Chapter 14: Socioemotional Development in Middle Adulthood Personality Theories and Development Stability and Change Close Relationships Chapter 15: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood Longevity, Biological Aging, and Physical Development Health Cognitive Functioning Work and Retirement Mental Health Chapter 16: Socioemotional Development in Late Adulthood Theories of Socioemotional Development Personality and Society Families and Social Relationships Ethnicity, Gender, and Culture Chapter 17: Death and Grieving Defining Death and Life/Death Issues Death and Sociohistorical, Cultural Contexts Facing One’s Own Death Coping with the Death of Someone Else
International Edition ESSENTIALS OF LIFE-SPAN DEVELOPMENT John W Santrock 2008 / 512 pages ISBN: 9780073405513 ISBN: 9780071283441 [IE] Available: August 2007
www.mhhe.com/santrockessls What’s the single, most often expressed issue in the Life-Span Development course? Covering a lifetime of material. Instructors from across the country are clamoring for a streamlined text capturing the core concepts of life-span development. Essentials of Life-Span Development was carefully designed and constructed to deliver these core concepts, along with a strong applications focus reflecting the broad range of interests and backgrounds of students taking this course. and as always, with John Santrock’s texts, the latest research in the field is incorporated throughout. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction The Life-span Perspective The Nature of Development Theories of Development Research in Life-span Development Chapter 2: Biological Beginnings The Evolutionary Perspective Genetic Foundations of Development Heredity and Environment Interaction: The Nature-nurture Debate Prenatal Development Chapter 3: Physical and Cognitive Development in Infancy Motor Development Sensory and Perceptual Development Cognitive Development Language Development Chapter 4: Socioemotional Development in Infancy Emotional and Personality Development Attachment Social Contexts Chapter 5: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood Physical Changes Cognitive Changes Language Development Early Childhood Education Chapter 6: Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood Emotional and Personality Development Families Relations, Play, and Television Chapter 7: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and Late Childhood Physical Changes and Health Children with Disabilities Cognitive Changes Language Development Chapter 8: Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late Childhood Emotional and Personality Development Families Peers Friends Schools Chapter 9: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence The Nature of Adolescence Physical Changes Issues in Adolescent Health Adolescent Cognition Schools
23
Developmental Psychology
Human Development / Lifespan – Topical
v Visual Assets Database. VAD, McGraw-Hill’s online database of hundreds of developmental video & audio clips, photographs, and illustrations for instructors is available to adopters. All of these resources are playable online or downloadable to any location you choose. CONTENTS Section 1: The Life-Span Perspective Chapter 1: Introduction Appendix: Careers in Life-Span Development Section 2: Biological Processes, Physical Development, and Health Chapter 2: Biological Beginnings Chapter 3: Physical Development and Biological Aging Chapter 4: Health Chapter 5: Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual Development Section 3: Cognitive Processes and Development Chapter 6: Cogntive Developmental Approaches < Cognitive of Theory> Chapter 7: Information Processing Chapter 8: Intelligence Chapter 9: Language Development Section 4: Socioemotional Processes and Development Chapter 10: Emotional Development Chapter 11: The Self, Identity, and Personality Chapter 12: Gender and Sexuality Chapter 13: Moral Development, Values and Religion Section 5: Social Contexts of Development Chapter 14: Families, Lifestyles, and Parenting Chapter 15: Peers and the Sociocultural World Chapter 16: Schools, Achievement, and Work Section 6: Endings Chapter 17: Death, Dying, and Grieving
NEW
*9780073370934* A TOPICAL APPROACH TO LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT 5th Edition John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas 2010 / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073370934 Available: December 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockldt5e John Santrock’s A Topical Approach to Life-Span Development combines the most current research with a proven pedagogical system to provide instructors and students with the best-selling topically arranged introduction to lifespan development. Drawing on a who’s who list of expert consultants in all areas of developmental psychology, Santrock once again provides a trusted, comprehensive, readable, and engaging survey of the field. Rich applications and examples from a range of areas such as parenting, health care, and education ensure that students will remain engaged with the material. Significant revisions for the 5th edition include updated discussions of health and well-being as well as expanded coverage of diversity, culture, and gender. FEATURES v Contemporary and classic research. The 5th edition boasts more than 1,200 new research citations from 2007-2010, as well as classic references from the twentieth century. To ensure this currency and accuracy across all the stages of the life-span, a panel of leading experts in many different areas of developmental psychology provide detailed evaluations and recommendations in their areas of expertise. v Proven Learning System. To keep students from drowning in the sea of information covered in the course, the Learning System keeps the key ideas in front of them from the beginning to the end of the chapter. Learning goals are presented at the beginning of each chapter (in conjunction with a chapter outline/map), revisited in the “Review and Reflect” summary that concludes each section, and summarized in a “Reach Your Learning Goals” end-of-chapter visual. v Coverage of career opportunities in life-span development. Careers in Life-Span Development inserts in each chapter profile an individual whose career relates to the chapter’s content. The Careers Appendix describes a number of careers in education/ research, clinical/counseling, medical/nursing/physical, and family/ relationships categories. v Connections between theory and applications. Santrock provides a wealth of applied examples to show students the personal meaning life-span development has for them. In addition to the narrative’s applications, each chapter also boasts an Applications in Life-Span Development interlude. These focus on health and well-being, parenting, and education.
24
Developmental Psychology
Human Development / Lifespan – Readers
NEW
*9780078127779* ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 09/10 (2010 UPDATE) 38th Edition
NEW
*9780078050626* ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 10/11 39th Edition
Karen L Freiberg, University of MarylandBaltimore County 2010 / Softcover / 208 pages ISBN: 9780078127779 Available: February 2009
Karen L Freiberg, University of Maryland-Baltimore County 2011 / 224 pages ISBN: 9780078050626 Available: March 2010
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127777.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Human_ Development_0910Update.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update) with the corresponding chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Development textbooks by Santrock and Dacey et al.
NEW
*9780078049958* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT 3rd Edition
CONTENTS Unit 1: Genetic and Prenatal Influences on Development Part A. Genetic Influences 1. The Identity Dance 2. The Power to Divide, Rick Weis Part B. Prenatal Influences 3. The Mystery of Fetal Life: Secrets of the Womb 4. Fat, Carbs and the Science of Conception 5. The Hunt for Golden Eggs 6. The Curious Lives of Surrogates Unit 2: Development During Infancy and Early Childhood Part A. Infancy 7. HHS Toned Down Breast-Feeding Ads: Formula Industry Urged Softer Campaign 8. Reading Your Baby’s Mind 9. 20 Ways to Boost Your Baby’s Brain Power Part B. Early Childhood 10. Long-Term Studies of Preschool: Lasting Benefits Far Outweigh Costs 11. Accountability Comes to Preschool: Can We Make It Work for Young Children? Unit 3: Development During Childhood: Cognition and Schooling Part A. Cognition 12. Informing the ADHD Debate
Andrew Guest, University of Portland 2011 / 480 pages ISBN: 9780078049958 Available: February 2010
www.mhhe.com/takingsides Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
25
Developmental Psychology TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT 2nd Edition
13. Why We Need “The Year of Languages” Part B. Schooling 14. The New First Grade: Too Much Too Soon? 15. Ten Big Effects of the No Child Left Behind Act on Public Schools 16. The Power of Teaching Students Using Strengths 17. A “Perfect” Case Study: Perfectionism in Academically Talented Fourth Graders Unit 4: Development During Childhood: Family and Culture Part A. Family 18. You and Your Quirky Kid 19. The Blank Slate 20. Parents Behaving Badly 21. Where Personality Goes Awry Part B. Culture 22. Girls Gone Bad? 23. Disrespecting Childhood Unit 5: Development During Adolescence and Young Adulthood Part A. Adolescence 24. Parents or Pop Culture? Children’s Heroes and Role Models 25. A Peaceful Adolescence 26. Homeroom Zombies 27. Jail Time Is Learning Time Part B. Young Adulthood 28. How Spirit Blooms 29. What Addicts Need 30. Getting Back on Track 31. Men & Depression: Facing Darkness UNIT 6: Development During Middle and Late Adulthood Part A. Middle Adulthood 32. Emotions and the Brain: Laughter 33. 50 Reasons to Love Being 50+ 34. The Myth of the Midlife Crisis Part B. Late Adulthood 35. The Wonder of Work 36. Second Time Around 37. Secrets of the Centenarians 38. Lost and Found 39. Life after Death 40. Navigating Practical Dilemmas in Terminal Care, Helen Sorenson, Emphysema/COPD: The Journal of Patient-Centered Care, Vol. 1., No. 1 Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
Andrew Guest, University of Portland 2009 / 432 pages ISBN: 9780073515281 Available: February 2008
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 280/mhtml This Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online. CONTENTS Unit 1 General Issues in the Study Of Lifespan Development Issue 1. Does the Cultural Environment Influence Lifespan Development More than Our Genes? Issue 2. Are Peers More Important than Parents during the Process of Development? Issue 3. Do Significant Innate Differences Influence the Career Success of Males and Females? Unit 2 Prenatal Development and Infancy Issue 4. Does Prenatal Exposure to Drugs Such as Cocaine Create “Crack Babies” with Special Developmental Concerns? Issue 5. Is There a “Myth of the First Three Years”? Issue 6. Are There Good Reasons to Allow Infants to Consume Electronic Media, Such as Television? Unit 3 Early Childhood and Middle Childhood Issue 7. Is Advertising Responsible for Childhood Obesity? Issue 8. Does Emphasizing Academic Skills Help At-Risk Preschool Children? Issue 9. Is Attention Deficit Disorder (ADD/ADHD) a Legitimate Medical Condition That Affects Childhood Behavior? Unit 4 Adolescence Issue 10. Are Efforts to Improve Self-Esteem Misguided? Issue 11. Should Contemporary Adolescents Be Engaged in More Structured Activities? Issue 12. Does Violent Media Cause Teenage Aggression? Unit 5 Youth and Early Adulthood Issue 13. Are Contemporary Young Adults More Selfish than Previous Generations? Issue 14. Are College Graduates Unprepared for Adulthood and the World of Work? Unit 6 Middle Adulthood Issue 15. Is the Institution of Marriage at Risk? Issue 16. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parents for Children? Issue 17. Is Religion a Pure Good in Facilitating Well-Being during Adulthood? Unit 7 Later Adulthood Issue 18. Can We Universally Define “Successful Aging”? Issue 19. Are Brain Exercises Unhelpful in Preventing Cognitive Decline in Old Age? Issue 20. Should the Terminally Ill Be Able to Have Physicians Help Them Die?
26
Developmental Psychology
Child Development – Chronological
Chapter 7: Socioemotional Development In Infancy Section 4 Early Childhood Chapter 8: Physical Development In Early Childhood Chapter 9: Cognitive Development In Early Childhood Chapter 10: Socioemotional Development In Early Childhood Section 5 Middle And Late Childhood Chapter 11: Physical Development In Middle And Late Childhood Chapter 12: Cognitive Development In Middle And Late Childhood Chapter 13: Socioemotional Development In Middle And Late Childhood Section 6 Adolescence Chapter 14: Physical Development In Adolescence Chapter 15: Cognitive Development In Adolescence Chapter 16: Socioemotional Development In Adolescence Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
*9780073532004* NEW International Edition
CHILDREN 11th Edition John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas
International Edition
2010 / 704 pages ISBN: 9780073532004 ISBN: 9780070182738 [IE] Available: December 2009
A CHILD’S WORLD 11th Edition
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockc11e
Diane E Papalia Ruth Duskin Feldman 2008 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073531977 ISBN: 9780071270304 [IE] Available: November 2007
John Santrock’s Children combines proven pedagogy and the most current research to provide a market leading presentation of child development. This time tested text provides compelling contemporary research, including updates from eight leading experts in the field. The text’s accessible presentation, plentiful applications and engaging writing foster increased mastery of the content. The new edition includes substantially expanded material on subjects including children’s health and well-being, parenting and education, diversity, culture, and gender.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaacwll This fully-revised eleventh edition continues to provide the extensive cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the innovative pedagogical learning system, and the balance between research and real-life applications that have made A Child’s World a favorite of students and professors alike. In the warmly-written and engaging style that has become their hallmark, Diane Papalia and Ruth Feldman continue to provide a chronological view of child development; the new edition expands the coverage of cultural and historical influences on development, highlights the latest research in cognitive neuroscience and evolutionary theory, and features a new and improved Visual Assets Database for instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION v The Latest Research. The 11th edition of Children contains the most contemporary research, with more than 1,200 new research citations from 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 as well as classic references from the twentieth century. To ensure this currency and accuracy throughout the text, a panel of leading experts in many different areas of child development provide detailed evaluations and recommendations in their areas of expertise. The text also features a Research in Children’s Development interlude in each chapter.
CONTENTS
v Expanded Contemporary Coverage of Children’s Health and Wellness. This edition features an extensively revised and very contemporary discussion of children’s health and well-being, including new material in Caring for Children interludes. v
Chapter 1: Studying A Child’s World Chapter 2: A Child’s World: How We Discover It Chapter 3: Forming a New Life: Conception, Heredity, and Environment Chapter 4: Pregnancy and Prenatal Development Chapter 5: Birth and the Newborn Baby Chapter 6: Physical Development and Health During the First Three Years Chapter 7: Cognitive Development during the First Three Years Chapter 8: Psychosocial Development during the First Three Years Chapter 9: Physical Development and Health in Early Childhood Chapter 10: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood Chapter 11: Psychosocial Development in Early Childhood Chapter 12: Physical Development and Health in Middle Childhood Chapter 13: Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood Chapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood Chapter 15: Physical Development and Health in Adolescence Chapter 16: Cognitive Development in Adolescence Chapter 17: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
Expanded and Updated Material on Parenting and Education
v Expanded and Updated Coverage of Diversity, Culture, and Gender. In addition to significant new coverage, the text continues to feature Diversity in Children’s Development interludes in each chapter. CONTENTS Contents Section 1 The Nature Of Children’s Development Chapter 1: Introduction Appendix: Careers In Child Development Section 2 Beginnings Chapter 2: Biological Beginnings Chapter 3: Prenatal Development Chapter 4: Birth Section 3 Infancy Chapter 5: Physical Development In Infancy Chapter 6: Cognitive Development In Infancy
27
Developmental Psychology International Edition
International Edition
CHILD DEVELOPMENT
CHILD DEVELOPMENT WITH MULTIMEDIA COURSEWARE CD AND POWERWEB 5th Edition
Charlotte Patterson, University of VA-Charlottesville 2008 / 736 pages ISBN: 9780072347951 ISBN: 9780071101707 [IE] Available: November 2007
Ganie B. DeHart, SUNY-Geneseo, L. Alan Sroufe, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis and Robert G. Cooper, San Jose State University 2004 / Hardcover with CD-ROM / 640 pages ISBN: 9780072900088 ISBN: 9780071217033 [IE] (Out of Print)
www.mhhe.com/pattersoncd1e Bringing the research to life through stories. What prompted Virginia Apgar to develop what became the Apgar Test? Who knew that Eleanor Gibson’s famous “visual cliff” experiment was inspired by her own toddler’s experience at the Grand Canyon? These stories help students appreciate the relevance of theory, and help them internalize and learn the often research-intensive material.
Website: www.mhhe.com/dehart5 CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Nature of Development Part One: Beginnings Chapter 2: The Contexts of Development Chapter 3: Heredity and Prenatal Development Part Two: Infancy Chapter 4: First Adaptations Chapter 5: Infant Cognitive Development Chapter 6: Infant Social and Emotional Development Part Two Epilogue: Infancy Part Three: TODDLERHOOD Chapter 7: Toddler Language and Thinking Chapter 8: Toddler Social and Emotional Development Part Three Epilogue: Toddlerhood Part Four: Early Childhood Chapter 9: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood Chapter 10: Social and Emotional Development in Early Childhood Part Four Epilogue: Early Childhood Part Five: Middle Childhood Chapter 11: Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood Chapter 12: Social and Emotional Development in Middle Childhood Part Five Epilogue: Middle Childhood Part Six: Adolescence Chapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence Chapter 14: Social and Emotional Development in Adolescence Part Six Epilogue: Adolescence Part Seven: Disorders And Resiliency Chapter 15: Developmental Psychopathology Part Seven Epilogue: Psychopathology and Individual Lives
CONTENTS Beginnings 1 Introduction to Child Development 2 Heredity, Environment, and Prenatal Development 3 Birth and the Newborn Infant Infancy and the Toddler Years 4 Physical Development and Health During Infancy and the Toddler Years 5 Cognitive and Language Development During Infancy and the Toddler Years 6 Social and Emotional Development During Infancy and the Toddler Years Early Childhood 7 Physical Development and Health During Early Childhood 8 Cognitive Development During Early Childhood 9 Social and Emotional Development During Early Childhood Middle Childhood 10 Physical Development and Health During Middle Childhood 11 Cognitive Development During Middle Childhood 12 Social and Emotional Development During Middle Childhood Adolescence 13 Physical Development and Health During Adolescence 14 Cognitive Development During Adolescence 15 Social and Emotional Development During Adolescence
28
Developmental Psychology
Child Development – Topical
International Edition CHILD DEVELOPMENT: AN INTRODUCTION 12th Edition John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas 2009 / Hardcover / 704 pages ISBN: 9780073370637 ISBN: 9780071280815 [IE] Available: November 2008
International Edition CHILD PSYCHOLOGY: A CONTEMPORARY VIEW POINT 7th Edition
http://www.mhhe.com/santrockcd12e Thorough. Accurate. Reliable. Engaging. These are just a few of the words used by adopters and reviewers of John Santrock’s Child Development. Child Development is widely considered the most accurate and up-to-date topically-organized text in the field. Used by hundreds of thousands of students over eleven editions, its learning goals-driven learning system provides a clear roadmap to student understanding of the content. The fully revised twelfth edition reinforces the highly contemporary tone and focus by featuring hundreds of new citations.
Ross D Parke and Mary Gauvain of University of California-Riverside 2009 / Hardcover / 720 pages ISBN: 9780073382685 ISBN: 9780071269896 [IE] Available: June 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/parke7e This classic text once again provides a compelling topically-organized introduction to child development. Parke et al incorporate multiple perspectives in exploring the processes of child development. With recurring pedagogical features to ensure students see the interrelatedness of chapters and concepts and the chronological development of children, the authors have also taken care to further their student-friendly presentation by shortening the text in this edition. This has been accomplished without cutting the book’s highlyregarded child psychopathology chapter.
CONTENTS Preface Section One--The Nature of Child Development Chapter 1. Introduction Appendix. Careers in Child Development Section Two--Biological Processes, Physical Development, and Perceptual Development Chapter 2. Biological Beginnings Chapter 3. Prenatal Development and Birth Chapter 4. Physical Development and Health Chapter 5. Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual Development Section Three--Cognitive and Language Chapter 6. Cognitive Developmental Approaches Chapter 7. Information Processing Chapter 8. Intelligence Chapter 9. Language Development Section Four--Socioemotional Development Chapter 10. Emotional Development Chapter 11. The Self and Identity Chapter 12. Gender Chapter 13. Moral Development Section Five--Social Context of Development Chapter 14. Families Chapter 15. Peers Chapter 16. Schools and Achievement Chapter 17. Culture and Diversity
CONTENTS Chapter 1 Child Development: Themes, Theories, and Methods Chapter 2: Heredity and the Environment Chapter 3: Prenatal Development and Birth Chapter 4: Infancy: Sensation, Perception, and Learning Chapter 5: The Child’s Growth: Brain, Body, Motor Skills, and Sexual Maturation Chapter 6: Emotional Development and Attachment Chapter 7: Language and Communication Chapter 8: Cognitive Development: Piaget and Vygotsky Chapter 9: Cognitive Development: The Information-Processing Approach Chapter 10: Intelligence and Achievement Chapter 11: The Family Chapter 12: Expanding the Social World: Peers and Friends Chapter 13: Gender Roles and Gender Differences Chapter 14: Morality, Altruism, and Aggression Chapter 15: Developmental Psychopathology
29
Developmental Psychology
Child Development – Readers / Cases
NEW
*9780078127847* ANNUAL EDITIONS: CHILD GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 17th Edition
NEW
*9780078127571* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY 8th Edition
Ellen N Junn, California State UniversityFullerton Chris J Boyatzis, Bucknell University 2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127847 Available: October 2009
Diana S Del Campo and Robert L Del Campo of New Mexico State University-Las Cruces 2010 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780078127571 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812784X.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127572.mhtml Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource. NEW TO THIS EDITION v To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077304608).
CONTENTS Unit 1: Conception to Birth 1. New Calculator Factors Chances for Very Premature Infants 2. Success at Last Unit 2: Cognition, Language, and Learning Part A. Early Cognition and Physical Development 3. Infants’ Differential Processing of Female and Male Face 4. The Other-Race Effect Develops during Infancy 5. New Advances in Understanding Sensitive Periods in Brain Development 6. Contributions of Neuroscience to Our Understanding of Cognitive Development 7. It’s Fun, but Does It Make You Smarter? 8. Language and Children’s Understanding of Mental States 9. Children’s Biased Evaluations of Lucky versus Unlucky People and Their Social Groups 10. Future Thinking in Young Children Part B. Learning in School 11. The Secret to Raising Smart Kids 12. When Should a Kid Start Kindergarten? Unit 3: Social and Emotional Development Part A. The Child’s Feelings: Emotional Development 13. A Neurobiological Perspective on Early Human Deprivation 14. Children’s Capacity to Develop Resiliency 15. Emotions and the Development of Childhood Depression: Bridging the Gap Part B. Entry into the Social World: Peers, Play, and Popularity 16. Cooperation and Communication in the 2nd Year of Life 17. The Serious Need for Play 18. Children’s Social and Moral Reasoning about Exclusion 19. When Girls and Boys Play: What Research Tells Us 20. A “Multitude” of Solitude 21. Girls Just Want to Be Mean 22. The Role of Neurobiological Deficits in Childhood Antisocial Behavior
30
Developmental Psychology Unit 4: Parenting and Family Issues 23. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents 24. Evidence of Infants’ Internal Working Models of Attachment 25. Physical Discipline and Children’s Adjustment 26. Children of Alcoholics 27. Within-Family Differences in Parent-Child Relations across the Life Course 28. Tempering Toddler Tantrums Now May Prevent Aggression Later 29. Adoption Is a Successful Natural Intervention Enhancing Adopted Children’s IQ and School Performance 30. Parental Divorce and Children’s Adjustment 31. The Case against Breast-Feeding Unit 5: Cultural and Societal Influences Part A. Social and Cultural Issues 32. Goodbye to Girlhood 33. The Developmental Costs of High Self-Esteem for Antisocial Children 34. Trials for Parents Who Choose Faith over Medicine 35. The Baby Deficit Part B. Special Challenges 36. How to Win the Weight Battle 37. The Impact of Trafficking on Children 38. The Epidemic That Wasn’t 39. What Autistic Girls Are Made Of 40. Three Reasons Not to Believe in an Autism Epidemic 41. Getting Back to the Great Outdoors 42. What Causes Specific Language Impairment in Children? 43. Treatment and Prevention of Posttraumatic Stress Reactions in Children and Adolescents Exposed to Disasters and Terrorism: What Is the Evidence? Test-Your-Knowledge Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078135880* ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILY 10/11 36th Edition Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana University-Bloomington
2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078135880 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078135885.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION
Child, Family & Society
v
Correlation Guide:
v w w w. m h h e . c o m / m h c p / C o r r e l a t i o n G u i d e s / A E _ T h e _ Family_1011.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: The Family 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in two of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Family textbooks by Newman and DeGonova/Rice.
NEW
CONTENTS
*9780078127571*
UNIT 1: Evolving Perspectives on the Family 1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience 2. Interracial Families 3. Children as a Public Good 4. Family Partnerships UNIT 2: Exploring and Establishing Relationships Part A. Love and Sex 5. This Thing Called Love 6. Pillow Talk 7. 24 Things Love and Sex Experts are Dying to Tell You Part B. Choosing a Mate 8. On-Again, Off-Again Part C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation 9. Fats, Carbs and the Science of Conception 10. Starting the Good Life in the Womb 11. Not Always ‘the Happiest Time’ 12. Adopting a New American Family UNIT 3: Family Relationships Part A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships 13. Free As a Bird and Loving It 14. Gay Marriage Lite 15. Two Mommies and a Daddy Part B. Relationships between Parents and Children 16. Good Parents, Bad Results 17. Do We Need a Law to Prohibit Spanking?
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY 8th Edition Diana S Del Campo and Robert L Del Campo of New Mexico State University-Las Cruces 2010 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780078127571 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127572.mhtml Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
31
Developmental Psychology
Adolescence – Texts
18. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents 19. Prickly Pere Part C. Other Family Relationships 20. The Forgotten Siblings 21. Being a Sibling 22. Aunties and Uncles 23. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural Crisis UNIT 4: Challenges and Opportunities Part A. Family Violence and Chaos 24. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse 25. Domestic Abuse Myths Part B. Substance Abuse 26. Children of Alcoholics 27. Impact of Family Recovery and Pre-Teens and Adolescents Part C. Infidelity 28. My Cheatin’ Heart 29. Love But Don’t Touch 30. Is This Man Cheating on His Wife? Part D. Economic Concerns 31. The Opt-Out-Myth 32. Making Time for Family Time Part E. Illness and Death in the Family 33. Partners Face Cancer Together 34. Dealing Day-to-Day With Diabetes: A Whole Family Experience 35. Caring for the Caregiver 36. Bereavement after Caregiving 37. Love, Loss—And Love Part F. War the Stress of Separation 38. Stressors Afflicting Families During Military Deployment 39. Children of the Wars Part F. Divorce and Remarriage 40. A Divided House 41. Civil Wars 42. Stepfamily Success Depends on Ingredients UNIT 5: Families, Now and into the Future 43. Get a Closer Look 44. The Joy of Rituals 45. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades 46. The Consumer Crunch 47. Sparking Interest in Nature—Family Style Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780073532035* ADOLESCENCE 9th Edition Laurence Steinberg, Temple University-Philadelphia 2011 / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073532035 Available: June 2010
[Details unavailable at press time]
*9780073370675* NEW International Edition
ADOLESCENCE 13th Edition John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas
2010 / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073370675 ISBN: 9780070164987 [IE] Available: October 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/santrocka13e More students learn from John Santrock’s Adolescence than from any other text in this field. The 13th edition combines proven pedagogy and the most current research to provide a market leading presentation of adolescence. This time tested text provides compelling contemporary research, including updates from eleven leading experts in the field. The text’s accessible presentation, plentiful applications and engaging writing foster increased mastery of the content. The new edition includes substantially expanded material on diversity and culture, adolescents’ and emerging adults’ health and well-being, including numerous recommendations for improving the lives of adolescents, and expanded emphasis on the positive aspects of adolescent development. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Expanded and updated coverage of diversity and culture. The 13th edition contains the most contemporary research, with more than 1,000 new research citations from 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 as well as classic references from the twentieth century. To ensure currency and accuracy throughout the text, a panel of eleven leading experts in many different areas of adolescent development provided detailed evaluations and recommendations in their areas of expertise. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Puberty, Health, and Biological Foundations
32
Developmental Psychology Chapter 3: The Brain and Cognitive Development Chapter 4: The Self, Identity, Emotion, and Personality Chapter 5: Gender Chapter 6: Sexuality Chapter 7: Moral Development, Values, and Religion Chapter 8: Families Chapter 9: Peers, Romantic Relationships, and Life Styles Chapter 10: Schools Chapter 11: Achievement, Work, and Careers Chapter 13: Problems in Adolescence and Emerging Adulthood
International Edition ADOLESCENCE: CONTINUITY, CHANGE, AND DIVERSITY 6th Edition Nancy Cobb, California State University--Los Angeles 2007 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073194721 (Out of Print) ISBN: 9780071106405 [IE] Available: June 2006
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cobb6 CONTENTS
International Edition
Chapter 1 Defining Adolescents: Who Are They? Chapter 2 Theoretical Foundations of Adolescent Development Chapter 3 The Biological and Physical Changes of Adolescence Chapter 4 The Cognitive and Intellectual Changes of Adolescence Chapter 5 Defining the Self: Identity and Intimacy Chapter 6 The Sexual Self: Close Relationships in Adolescence Chapter 7 Adolescents in the Family: Changing Roles and Relationships Chapter 8 Adolescents and Their Friends Chapter 9 Adolescents in the Schools Chapter 10 Work, Careers, and College: New Decisions, New Ways of Thinking Chapter 11 Facing the Future: Values in Transition Chapter 12 The Problems of Youth Chapter 13 Positive Development in Adolescence: Meeting the Challenges and Making It Work Chapter 14 Studying Adolescence: Research Methods and Issues
ADOLESCENCE 8th Edition Laurence Steinberg, Temple University-Philadelphia 2008 / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073405483 ISBN: 9780071101721 [IE] Available: June 2007
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/steinberg8 Adolescence, 8th edition by Laurence Steinberg has been thoroughly updated to reflect current findings in the field of adolescent development. In this edition, the author continues to utilize the effective combination of a friendly writing style, thorough research and a contextual approach that emphasizes adolescence in contemporary society. The text’s careful organization ensures maximum teaching flexibility that allows the chapters to work together or be covered in sequence or stand alone. Ethnicity and minority issues are thoroughly discussed in a way that enables students to see how the adolescent experience is shaped by class and culture. The strong pedagogical framework helps students organize and integrate material. Adolescence, 8th edition, is based on solid research and theory, yet it has a distinctively “real world” feel that emphasizes the reality of being an adolescent in today’s society. CONTENTS Preface Introduction: The Study of Adolescent Development Part I: The Fundamental Changes of Adolescence Chapter 1 Biological Transitions Chapter 2 Cognitive Transitions Chapter 3 Social Transitions Part II: The Contexts of Adolescence Chapter 4 Families Chapter 5 Peer Groups Chapter 6 Schools Chapter 7 Work, Leisure, and Mass Media Part III: Psychosocial Development During Adolescence Chapter 8 Identity Chapter 9 Autonomy Chapter 10 Intimacy Chapter 11 Sexuality Chapter 12 Achievement Chapter 13 Psychosocial Problems In Adolescence Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
33
Developmental Psychology
Adolescence – Reader / Cases
Unit 4: The Contexts of Adolescents in Society: School, Work, and Diversity 23. The Dropout Problem: Losing Ground, Paul E. Barton 24. My Year as a High School Student 25. School’s New Rule for Pupils in Trouble: No Fun 26. In an Era of School Shootings, Lockdowns Are the New Drill 27. Effects of After-School Employment on Academic Performance 28. Immigrant Youth in U.S. Schools: Opportunities for Prevention 29. Reducing School Violence: School-Based Curricular Programs and School Climate 30. The Cultural Plunge 31. Character and Academics: What Good Schools Do 32. High School with a College Twis Unit 5: Problem Behaviors and Challenges of Adolescents 33. Video Game Violence 34. The Overdominance of Computers 35. Bullying at School among Older Adolescents 36. Underage Drinking Debate: Zero Tolerance Vs. Teaching Responsibility 37. Problem Gambling in Youth--A Hidden Addiction 38. Understanding Cutting in Adolescents; Prevalence, Prevention, and Intervention 39. Violence in Adolescent Dating Relationships 40. Prevention of Domestic Violence during Adolescence 41. Prescription for Disaste 42. Youth’s Reactions to Disasters and the Factors That Influence Their Response Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127755* ANNUAL EDITIONS: ADOLESCENCE PSYCHOLOGY 7th Edition Fred E Stickle, Western Kentucky University 2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127755 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127750.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. CONTENTS Unit 1: Perspective on Adolescent Development 1. Trashing Teens 2. Profile in Caring 3. A Peaceful Adolescence 4. Something to Talk About 5. Youth Participation Unit 2: Developmental Changes of Adolescents: Physical, cognitive, and social 6. Healthier Students, Better Learners 7. Mental Assessment Test 8. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Female and Males: Risk and Resilience 9. Goodbye to Girlhood 10. Influence of Music on Youth Behaviors 11. Researchers Examine the Impact of Early Experiences on Development 12. Adolescent Stress 13. Coping with Stress 14. ADHD and the SUD in Adolescents Unit 3: Relationships of Adolescents: Family, Peers, Intimacy, and Sexuality 15. Supporting Youth during Parental Development: Strategies for Professionals and Families 16. When Play Turns to Trouble 17. Aggression in Adolescent Dating Relationships: Predictors and Prevention 18. A Host of Trouble 19. Great Expectations 20. Reclaiming ‘Abstinence’ in Comprehensive Sex Education 21. Give Students the Knowledge to Make Wise Choices About Sex 22. The Perils of Playing House
34
Developmental Psychology
Adulthood and Aging
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN ADOLESCENCE 2nd Edition BJ Rue and Maureen Drysdale of St. Jerome’s University/University of Waterloo 2009 / Softcover / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073515366 Available: October 2008
International Edition ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING 6th Edition
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515361.mhtml
William J. Hoyer, Syracuse University and Paul A. Roodin, State University of NY-Oswego 2009 / Hardcover / 736 pages ISBN: 9780073128542 ISBN: 9780071270281 [IE] Available: July 2008
This Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: ADOLESCENCE presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hoyer6 Adult Development and Aging offers professors and students a clear, comprehensive and current account of the salient issues and concerns that dominate the field of adult development. Hoyer and Roodin employ an interdisciplinary, process oriented perspective to show students the past, present, and future of our understanding and research in adult development. In this thoroughly-revised new edition, Hoyer and Roodin continue to provide cutting edge material in an accessible manner for undergraduates. With a new theme of developmental bioculturalism running throughout, the authors also present the most balanced and comprehensive coverage of biological, health, cognitive, and social areas.
CONTENTS Part 1 Adolescent Health Issue 1. Should Adolescents Be Taking Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors (SSRIs) for Depression? Issue 2. Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Drink Alcohol? Issue 3. Should Parental Consent Be Required for Adolescents Seeking Abortions? Issue 4. Do Boys Worry About an Ideal Body Image as Much as Girls Do? Issue 5. Should the Human Papillomavirus (HPV) Vaccine be Mandatory for Early Adolescent Girls? Issue 6.Is the Use of Nicotine Replacement Therapy (NRT) an Appropriate Cessation Aid for Adolescents Wishing to Quit Smoking? Part 2 Sex and Sexuality Issue 7. Does Engaging in Early Sexual Activity Cause Depressive Symptoms in Adolescents? Issue 8. Is There Cause for Concern About an “Oral Sex Crisis” for Teens? Issue 9. Is Comprehensive Sex Education for Adolescents Too Liberal? Issue 10. Does a Traditional or “Strong” Double Standard with Respect to Sexual Behavior Exist Among Adolescents? Issue 11. Is Female Sexual Orientation More Fluid than Male Sexual Orientation During Adolescence? Part 3 Relationships Issue 12. Does Divorce or Disruption in Family Structure During Adolescence Have a Detrimental Effect on Development? Issue 13. Does Dating Impede Developmental Adjustment for Adolescents? Issue 14. Do Online Friendships Hinder Adolescent Well-Being? Part 4 Problem Behaviors Issue 15. Should Adolescents Who Commit Serious Offenses Be Tried and Convicted as Adults? Issue 16. Are Girls Bigger Bullies Than Boys? Part 5 Media Issue 17. Does Sex on TV Negatively Impact Adolescent Sexuality? Issue 18. Do Video Games Impede Adolescent Cognitive Development? Issue 19. Are Social Networking Sites (SNSs), such as Facebook, a Cause for Concern Among Adolescents?
CONTENTS 1 Adult Development And Aging: An Introduction 2 Cultural And Ethnic Diversity 3 Physiological And Sensory Processes 4 Coping And Adaptation 5 Mental Health Interventions 6 Physical Health And Aging 7 Memory, Attention, And Learning 8 Intelligence And Creativity 9 Cognition, Wisdom, And Expertise 10 Personality 11 Relationships 12 Work, Leisure, And Retirement 13 Approaching Death Appendix Developmental Research Methods
35
Developmental Psychology
Adulthood and Aging – Readers
International Edition ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING 3rd Edition Diane Papalia and Harvey Sterns of University of Akron and Ruth Feldman and Cameron Camp of Myers Research Institute 2007 / Hardcover / 608 pages ISBN: 9780072937886 ISBN: 9780071112871 [IE] Available: June 2006
NEW
*9780078050596* ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 10/11 23rd Edition
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaad3 CONTENTS
Harold Cox 2011 / 224 pages ISBN: 9780078050596 Available: March 2010
Part I: Exploring the World of Adulthood 1 Adult Development and Aging in a Changing World 2 Metatheoretical Perspectives and Research Methods Part II: The Worlds of Body and Mind 3 Longevity and Physiological Aging 4 Health and Body Systems 5 Memory 6 Intelligence and Creativity 7 Mature Thought, Wisdom and Moral Intelligence Part III: The Social World 8 Education, Work, Leisure, And Retirement 9 Intimate Relationships and Lifestyles 10 Mature Kinship Ties and Living Arrangements Part IV: The World Within 11 Personality Development 12 Mental Health, Coping and Adjustment to Aging 13 Dealing with Death and Bereavement
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
36
Developmental Psychology Unit 5: Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma? 19. Retire Righ 20. Money for Life 21. Old. Smart. Productive. 22. Low-Cost Retirement 23. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of Older Americans Unit 6: The Experience of Dying 24. Development of Hospice and Palliative Care in the United States 25. The Grieving Process 26. Moving toward Peace: An Analysis of the Concept of a Good Death 27. Mind Frames towards Dying and Factors Motivating Their Adoption by Terminally Ill Elder Unit 7: Living Environment in Later Life 28. Making Your House Work 29. The Nursing Home Culture-Change Movement: Recent Past, Present, and Future Directions for Research 30. The Place of Assisted Living in Long-Term Care and Related Service Systems 31. Declaration of Independents: Home Is Where You Want to Live Forever. Here’s How Unit 8: Social Policies, Programs, and Services for Older Americans 32. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population 33. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years of Reform 34. Age Wave 35. Coverage for All 36. Riding into the Sunset: The Geezer Threat 37. Paying for It 38. As Good as It Gets 39. Population Aging Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127731* ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 09/10 22nd Edition Harold Cox, Indiana State University -Terre Haute 2010 / Softcover / 208 pages ISBN: 9780078127731 Available: March 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127734.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v
www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Aging_0910.pdf
v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Aging 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Aging textbooks by Hoyer/Roodin. CONTENTS Unit 1: The Phenomenon of Aging 1. Elderly Americans 2. New Age Thinking 3. Living Longer: Diet and Exercise 4. Living Healthy to 100 5. Will You Live to Be 100? 6. Faulty Fountains of Youth Unit 2: The Quality of Later Life 7. Stop Smoking and Benefits Come Quickly 8. Life after Death 9. Lifetime Achievements 10. We Can Control How We Age Unit 3: Societal Attitudes toward Old Age 11. Society Fears the Aging Process 12. A Healthy Mind, a Longer Life 13. The Secret Lives of Single Women 14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its Threat to Business Vitality Unit 4: Problems and Potentials of Aging 15. Alzheimer’s—The Case for Prevention 16. Trust and Betrayal in the Golden Years 17. Elderly Americans at Highest Risk for Suicide: Few Prevention Programs Target Their Needs, Sarah Skidmore 18. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of Older Women and Their Relationship with Health Outcomes
37
Developmental Psychology 17. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns toward Dying in Prison Unit 4: Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide 18. Death and the Law 19. What Living Wills Won’t Do: The Limits of Autonomy 20. Ethics and Life’s Ending: An Exchange 21. Suicidal Thoughts among College Students More Common than Expected 22. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame Unit 5: Funerals 23. The Tuneful Funeral 24. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects 25. The Arlington Ladies 26. Green Graveyards—A Natural Way to Go 27. Social Workers’ Final Act of Service: Respectful Burial Arrangements for Indigent, Unclaimed, and Unidentified People Unit 6: Bereavement 28. The Grieving Process 29. Disenfranchised Grief 30. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief 31. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning: The Onslaught Is Just Beginning 32. Life Is Like the Seasons 33. Counseling with Children in Contemporary Society Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127670* ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEALTH, AND BEREAVEMENT 09/10 11th Edition George E Dickinson, College of Charleston Michael R Leming, Saint Olaf College 2010 / Softcover / 192 pages ISBN: 9780078127670 Available: March 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Dying_Death_and Bereavement_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by DeSpelder/Strickland. CONTENTS Unit 1: Issues in Dying and Death 1. Death, Dying, and the Dead in Popular Culture 2. Dealing with the Dead Patient at the Intensive Care Unit 3. How Much Is More Life Worth?, 4. Confronting Death: Perceptions of a Good Death in Adults with Lung Cancer 5. Estimating Excess Mortality in Post-Invasion Iraq 6. The Sociology of Death Unit 2: Dying and Death across the Life Cycle 7. Rituals of Unburdening 8. To Live with No Regrets 9. ‘’Cast Me Not Off in Old Age’’ 10. Caregiving Systems at the End of Life: How Informal Caregivers and Formal Providers Collaborate 11. Needs of Elderly Patients in Palliative Care 12. Altered States: What I’ve Learned about Death & Disability 13. Life after Death Unit 3: The Dying Process 14. The Comfort Connection 15. Are They Hallucinations or Are They Real? The Spirituality of Deathbed and Near-Death Visions 16. Dying on the Streets: Homeless Persons’ Concerns and Desires about End-of-Life Care
38
Developmental Psychology
Developmental Psychopathology
International Edition DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOPATHOLOGY 5th Edition Charles Wenar, Ohio State University and Patricia Kerig, James Madison University 2006 / Hardcover / 544 pages ISBN: 9780072820195 ISBN: 9780071215206 [IE]
International Edition CHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGY Jeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University—Ithaca 2008 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073405506 ISBN: 9780071263542 [IE] Available: October 2007
www.mhhe.com/wenar5 CONTENTS 1: The Developmental Psychopathology Approach 2: Normal Development 3: The Bridge to the Psychopathologies 4: Infancy: The Developmental Consequences of Mental Retardation 5: Infancy: Disorders in the Autistic Spectrum 6: Infancy through Preschool Attachment Disorders, Oppositional Defiant Disorder, and Enuresis 7: The Preschool Period: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder and Learning Disabilities 8: Middle Childhood: The Anxiety Disorders 9: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Mood Disorders and Suicide 10: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Conduct Disorder and the Development of Antisocial Behavior 11: Severe Deviation in Late Childhood and Adolescence: Schizophrenia 12: Psychopathologies of the Adolescent Transmission: Eating Disorders and Substance Abuse 13: The Developmental Consequences of Brain Injury and Chronic Illness 14: Risks in the Family Context: Child Maltreatment and Domestic Violence 15: Late Adolescence to Early Adulthood: Emergent Personality Disorders 16: Psychological Assessment 17: Intervention and Prevention
www.mhhe.com/haugaard1 All students who will one day work with children or their families can gain a basic foundation for understanding child psychopathology from this text. Students who seek careers in the mental health, physical health, or social work fields will find extensive information on childhood disorders, their prevention, and their treatment. All will gain an appreciation for the many facets of this growing field, and of the need to base interventions on research and on a humane attitude toward each child and family. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical Issues Chapter 3 Basic Psychological Theories Chapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral Genetics Chapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment Disorders Chapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder Chapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder Chapter 8 Bipolar Disorder Chapter 9 Depressive Disorders Chapter 10 Anxiety Disorders Chapter 11 Mental Retardation Chapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental Disorders Chapter 13 Childhood-onset Schizophrenia Chapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and Other Trauma
39
Developmental Psychology
Gender Role Development
Masculine Subjectivity UNIT 2: Gender and Development 8. Gender and Group Process: A Developmental Perspective 9. Gender Bender 10. The Secret Lives of Single Women 11. Goodbye to Girlhood, 12. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior 13. How Many Fathers Are Best for a Child? 14. What Autistic Girls Are Made of UNIT 3: Gender and Education 15. Learning and Gender 16. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development 17. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating Gender-Friendly Middle School Classrooms 18. Female Faculty in Male-Dominated Fields: Law, Medicine, and Engineering 19. Scaling the Ivory Towers UNIT 4: Gender, Work, and Health Part A. Gender and Work 20. The Emperor’s New Woes 21. The Media Depiction of Women Who Opt Out 22. Great Expectations 23. Labor Markets, Breadwinning, and Beliefs: How Economic Context Shapes Men’s Gender Ideology Part B. Gender and Health 24. A Woman’s Curse? 25. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Females and Males: Risk and Resilience 26. When Sex Hurts 27. Health Behaviors, Prostate Cancer, and Masculinities: A Life Course Perspective UNIT 5: Genders and Sexualities 28. (Rethinking) Gender 29. Progress and Politics in the Intersex Rights Movement: Feminist Theory in Action 30. What Do Women Want? 31. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the More They Stay the Same 32. Peer Marriage 33. State of Our Unions: Marriage Promotion and the Contested Power of Heterosexuality 34. Five Years on, Gay Marriage Debate Fades in Massachusetts 35. Everyone’s Queer 36. The Berdache Tradition 37. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents UNIT 6: Gender and Social Issues 38. Flower Grandma’s Secret 39. Sexual Assault on Campus: What Colleges and Universities Are Doing about It 40. Male Rape Myths: The Role of Gender, Violence, and Sexism 41. Effects of Sexual Assaults on Men: Physical, Mental, and Sexual Consequences 42. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution 43. Fall Girls 44. Women, Citizens, Muslims 45. Beyond Hillary: Strength in Numbers Ann Friedman Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078049941* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER 5th Edition Jacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro 2011 / 416 pages ISBN: 9780078049941 Available: March 2010
www.mhhe.com/takingsides [Details unavailable at press time]
NEW
*9780078050527* ANNUAL EDITIONS: GENDER 10/11 Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages ISBN: 9780078050527 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078050529.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Theoretical and Research Perspectives 1. The Social Construction of Gender 2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social Relations 3. Gender Is Powerful: The Long Reach of Feminism 4. The World, the Flesh and the Devil 5. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women 6. Beauty, Gender and Stereotypes: Evidence from Laboratory Experiments 7. I’m Not a Very Manly Man: Qualitative Insights into Young Men’s
40
Developmental Psychology TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER 4th Edition Jacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro 2009 / Softcover / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073515298 Available: March 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtml This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to controversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent the arguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators, reflect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their liveliness and substance and because of their value in a debate framework. Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally and politically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKING SIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts, presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and public discourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills by analyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments. The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what is gender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover that what might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is so much more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only) accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have been provided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teaching suggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teaching hints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion around the themes raised by the clashing essays. CONTENTS Unit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving Target Issue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny? Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate? Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and Sciences Have a Biological Basis? Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of Difference Issue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different? Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and Men Innately Determined? Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responses to Stress Gender-Based? Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and Men Issue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender? Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levels of Violence Against Intimate Partners? Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape? Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender in Childhood Issue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry? Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parents for Children? Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being? Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society? Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of Work Issue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) Improve Women’s Lives? Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in the Workplace? Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified? Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to Societal Obstacles? Unit 6 Gender And Sexuality: Double Standards? Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong? Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message to Teens? Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional Gender Constraints?
41
Developmental Psychology
42
43
DEVELOPMENT EDUCATIONAL ENGLISHPSYCHOLOGY
Death and Dying .................................................................................................51 Child, Family & Society – Readers .....................................................................50 Educational Psychology .....................................................................................45 Educational Psychology – Readers ....................................................................48 Infants & Toddlers ...............................................................................................50
NEW TITLES EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 10/11, 25e
Cauley
9780078050602
48
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychologywith Free Annual Editions, 6e
Abbeduto
9780077386108
48
Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 09/10, 24e
Cauley
9780073516400
48
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Childhood and Society, 8e
Del Campo
9780078127571
50
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e
Dickinson
9780078127670
51
ISBN
Page
2010
44
Educational Psychology
Educational Psychology
International Edition EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 4th Edition
EdPSYCH: MODULES
John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas 2009 / Softcover / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073378589 ISBN: 9780071280822 [IE] Available: November 2008
Lisa Bohlin, Purdue University-West Lafayette Cheryl Cisero Durwin, Southern Conn State University Marla Reese-Weber, Illinois State University 2009 / Softcover / 688 pages ISBN: 9780073378503 Available: November 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/santedu4e
http://www.mhhe.com/bohlin1e
John Santrock’s Educational Psychology is a well-crafted text that emphasizes the application of theory to classroom practice. With richly evocative classroom vignettes provided by practicing teachers, as well as the most case studies - three per chapter - of any Introductory text, Santrock’s Educational Psychology helps students think critically about the research basis for best practices. Additionally, Santrock’s hallmark Learning System organizes the content into manageable chunks to support retention and mastery, and makes it much more likely that students will have an engaging and successful course experience.
Ed Psych Modules… For ALL your students. Ed Psych Modules speaks to all students regardless of their intended age stage specialization. With four case studies – early childhood, elementary, middle school, and secondary -- for each cluster of modules, your students effectively connect theory and practice using these realistic cases. Written to be used in any order, these modules and clusters give you maximum flexibility in organizing your course. The authors have also limited the use of boxes and other sidebars in order to ensure students identify and understand the core concepts of educational psychology.
CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1 Educational Psychology: A Tool for Effective Teaching Chapter 2 Cognitive and Language Development Chapter 3 Social Contexts and Socioemotional Development Chapter 4 Individual Varations Chapter 5 Sociocultural Diversity Chapter 6 Learners Who Are Exceptional Chapter 7 Behavioral and Social Cognitive Approaches Chapter 8 The Information-Processing Approach Chapter 9 Complex Cognitive Processes Chapter 10 Social Constructivist Approaches Chapter 11 Learning and Cognition in the Content Areas Chapter 12 Planning, Instruction, and Technology Chapter 13 Motivation, Teaching, and Learning Chapter 14 Managing the Classroom Chapter 15 Standardized Tests and Teaching Chapter 16 Classroom Assessment and Grading
CONTENTS Module 1: Today’s Diverse Classrooms Cluster 1: Personal Development Module 2: Contexts of Development Module 3: Social Development Module 4: Emotional Development Cluster 2: The Developing Learner Module 6: The Brain and Development Module 7: Cognitive Development Module 8: Language Development Cluster 3: Learning Theories Module 9: Traditional Behavioral Theories Module 10: Social Cognitive Theory Module 11: Information Processing Cluster 4: Cognitive Processes Module 12: Metacognition Module 13: Transfer of Skills and Knowledge Module 14: Critical Thinking and Problem Solving Cluster 5: Motivation Module 15: Behavioral Theory Module 16: Cognitive Theories Module 17: Self Theories Cluster 6: Classroom Management And Instruction Module 18: Creating a Productive Learning Environment Module 19: Understanding and Managing Student Behavior Module 20: Planning for Instruction Module 21: Grouping Practices Cluster 7: Learner Differences Module 22: Intelligence Module 23: Giftedness and Creativity Module 24: Cognitive Disabilities Module 25: Emotional, Social and Behavioral Disabilities Cluster 8: Classroom Assessment Module 26: Assessing Student Learning Module 27: Test Construction and Use Module 28: Performance Assessment Cluster 9: Standardized Testing Module 29: Standardized Tests and Scores Module 30: Issues in Standardized Testing
45
Educational Psychology ENHANCING COGNITIVE FUNTIONS APPLICATIONS ACROSS CONTEXTS
TO EMPOWER, BE EMPOWERED Yeap Lay Leng, Myint Swe Khine, Lim Lee Hean and Low Guat Tin 2005 (May 2005) / 264 pages ISBN: 9780071246491
Oon-Seng Tan and Alice Seok-Hoon Seng 2005 (May 2005) / 320 pages ISBN: 9780071247658 (Hardcover) ISBN: 9780071274777 (Softcover)
[An Asian Publication] “To empower, be empowered” are processes that enable individuals to take on greater responsibility and authority in decision making. The individuals’ potential to make decisions can be maximized within an environment that nurtures them through education, training, professional development, commitment, facilitation, resources, mutual trust and emotional support. In the educational context, “To empower, be empowered” is to provide a “self-surpassing classroom”, that is, a classroom environment with “self-surpassing teachers” who engage their students in purposeful activities and direct them to be responsible for their own learning. To Empower, Be Empowered is suitable and applicable for all those who are in people management. The 14 chapters in the book are interrelated topics, written from the different perspectives of empowerment.
[An Asian Publication] Cognitive functioning is a new and important advancement in cognitive psychology and cognitive science. Cognitive functions are a central focus in the dynamic and mediational approach to assessment and intervention. An understanding of cognitive functions is the key to the design of effective cognitive intervention and enrichment programs. This book focuses on the mind of the learner, particularly on the nature and characteristics of cognitive functioning. It covers innovative and effective approaches to the enhancement of learning potential and cognitive functioning of children and adolescents. The approaches are grounded in theories pertaining to cognitive functions, cognitive modifi ability, and dynamic assessment. Written in clear language, the book illustrates the nature of cognitive functioning and the application of certain cognitive programs and interventions across contexts. The nature of cognitive functioning today is of interest not only to cognitive psychologists but also to those working in the multiple disciplines of neuroscience, cognitive systems, and human factors design. Cognitive enrichment programs and assessment scales such as LPAD-B, FIE-B, ACFS, MindLadder, Building Blocks of Learning, and MIDAS and their applications in different environments are highlighted in the book and examples of good practice and a variety of mediational and dynamic assessment tools discussed. Educational practitioners working closely with children, counselors, parents, and caregivers will find the book a valuable reference.
CONTENTS About the Authors Introduction: Stepping Up Empowerment Chapter 1: Empowering the Learner Chapter 2: Understanding Learning Styles to Empower Learning Chapter 3: Learning Styles and Educational Issues Chapter 4: Empowerment through Cognitive Profi ling Chapter 5: Cognitive Matching to Empower Learning Chapter 6: Implications of Learning Styles in Empowering Learning Chapter 7: Empowering Learning with Cognitive Organizers Chapter 8: Empowering through Motivation: The Theory Chapter 9: Empowering through Motivation: The Practice Chapter 10: Empowering through Mentoring Chapter 11: Empowering through Coaching Chapter 12: Reframe to Empower Learning Chapter 13: Empowering the Teacher: First, Learn More Thyself Chapter 14: Initiatives to Empowerment in a ‘Learning Nation’ References Index
CONTENTS 1. Toward a Theory of Enhancing Cognitive Functions 2. An Integrative Approach to Knowledge Construction Functions (KCF) 3. Improving Cognitive Functions for Secondary School Students 4. The Application of Cognitive Functions Scale: A Dynamic Assessment Procedure for Young Children 5. The Feuerstein Programs for Early Assessment and Intervention: The LPAD-B and the FIE-B 6. Early Detection: Blessing or Curse 7. Mediation and Assessment of a Young and Low-functioning Child: An Initial Session 8. Building Blocks of Learning: Dynamic Assessment and Cognitive Mediation with Children 9. Cognitive Interventions for Memory Deficits 10. Enhancing Cognitive Functions via a Multiple Intelligences Assessment 11. Sensory and Cognitive Development in Adulthood
46
Educational Psychology THINKING ABOUT THINKING WHAT EDUCATORS NEED TO KNOW
COUNSELLING IN SCHOOLS THEORIES, PROCESSES AND TECHNIQUES
Jessie Ee, Agnes Chang and Oon-Seng Tan 2004 / 352 pages ISBN: 9780071235075
Esther Tan 2004 (December 2004) / 280 pages ISBN: 9780071233668
[An Asian Publication]
[An Asian Publication]
The new millennium calls for a breakthrough in the way we learn and think. How can we enhance the flexibility of the mind so that the spirit of innovation and enterprise can flourish and flow in those we nurture and teach? What do we know about the important roles played by attitudes, dispositions, intellectual habits, and motivation in the development of thinking? This book captures the latest research and applications in these fields with contributions by some of the most renowned researchers and practitioners intimately involved in research and pedagogy in self-regulated learning and metacognition.
This book is intended to be a comprehensive guide and useful resource for teachers, counsellors, parents and educators who believe in a holistic education for the young. The nurturing of the emotional, psychological, moral, physical, artistic and spiritual wellbeing of the young is just as important as challenging their minds and maximizing their intellectual potentials. The scope of the book is comprehensive and encompassing, covering a wide range of topics, including developmental group guidance, career guidance and career counselling, group dynamics and group counselling, individual counselling, and intervention strategies in working with children, youth and parents. There are also opportunities to learn about the development and management of guidance and counselling services in schools and how to conduct school-based research in guidance and counselling to enhance practice.
CONTENTS Part 1: Theory and Research, and their Implications Chapter 1: Pursuing Academic Self regulation: A 20-year Methodological Quest Chapter 2: Teaching to Facilitate Self regulated Learning Chapter 3: Principles of Self-regulated Learning for Teachers Chapter 4: Thinking for Yourself and Thinking Together: The Community of Inquiry as a Pedagogy for Self regulated Learning Chapter 5: Metacognitive Theory and Classroom Practices Chapter 6: Teachers’ Understanding and Practice of Strategy-based Instruction and Classroom Goal Orientations for Students’ Selfregulation: Findings across Cultures Chapter 7: Motivation, Strategies, and Achievement: A Comparison of Teachers and Students in High, Average, and Low Achieving Classes Part 2: Practice and Applications Chapter 8: Reflective Practice and Self regulation: Walking the Talk through Problem-based Learning in Teacher Education Chapter 9: Choosing the Right Teacher: When Self-regulation Can Hinder Learning Chapter 10: Talk Your Walk: Issues in Instruction of Self-regulatory Second Language Reading Chapter 11: Self-regulated Learning in Science Chapter 12: Fostering Students’ Self regulation Skills in Mathematical Problem-solving Chapter 13: Helping Students to Become Strategic Learners: The Roles of Assessment, Teachers, Instruction, and Students Chapter 14: Self-regulation for Adolescents with Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
CONTENTS Foreword Preface Chapter 1: Developmental Group Guidance in the Classroom Chapter 2: Working with Children Chapter 3: Working with Youth Chapter 4: Working with Parents Chapter 5: Career Guidance and Career Counselling in Schools Chapter 6: Group Counselling Chapter 7: Multidimensional Metatheoretical Counselling Model Chapter 8: An Ecological Multimodal Approach to Counselling Chapter 9: Managing Guidance and Counselling in Schools Chapter 10: Research in Guidance and Counselling About the Contributors Index
47
Educational Psychology
Educational Psychology – Readers
NEW
*9780073516400* ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 09/10 24th Edition
NEW
*9780078050602* ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 10/11 25th Edition
Kathleen M Cauley and Gina Pannozzo of Virginia Commonwealth University 2010 / Softcover / 256 pages ISBN: 9780073516400 Available: February 2009
Kathleen M Cauley and Gina Pannozzo of Virginia Commonwealth University 2011 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078050602 Available: March 2010
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516406.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Educational_ Psychology_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Educational Psychology textbooks by Santrock.
NEW
*9780077386108*
CONTENTS
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY With Free Annual Editions, 6th Edition
Unit 1: Perspectives on Teaching 1. Character and Academics: What Good Schools Do 2. Memories from the ‘Other’: Lessons in Connecting with Students 3. A National Tragedy: Helping Children Cope UNIT 2: Development Part A. Childhood 4. Play: Ten Power Boosts for Children’s Early Learning 5. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades 6. The Curriculum Superhighway Part B. Adolescence 7. The Under-Appreciated Role of Humiliation in the Middle School 8. Risk Taking in Adolescence: New Perspectives from Brain and Behavioral Science Unit 3: Individual Differences among Learners Part A. Exceptional Learning Needs 9. Thinking Positively: How Some Characteristics of ADHD Can Be Adaptive and Accepted in the Classroom 10. Universal Design in Elementary and Middle School Part B. Gifted and Talented 11. Recognizing Gifted Students: A Practical Guide for Teachers Part C. Cultural Diversity 12. Mélange Cities 13. Nine Powerful Practices: Nine Strategies Help Raise the Achievement of Students Living in Poverty
Leonard Abbeduto, University of Wisc Madison Frank Symons, University of Minnesota 2010 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780077386108 Available: November 2009 Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource. Visit www.mhhe.com/takingsides for more details. Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychology, 6/e (print text) is packaged with a FREE access code card for Annual Editions: Assessment and Evaluation 10/11 CourseSmart eBook by Sandra Williamson. CourseSmart is an online eTextbook. Visit www.coursesmart.com for further information.
48
Educational Psychology THE PRAXIS SERIES OF OFFICIAL GUIDE WITH CD-ROM 2nd Edition
14. Becoming Adept at Code-Switching 15. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating Gender-Friendly Middle School Classrooms Unit 4: Learning and Instruction Part A. Learning and Cognition 16. Differentiating for Tweens 17. Critical Thinking: Why Is It So Hard to Teach? 18. Constructing Learning: Using Technology to Support Teaching for Understanding 19. Successful Teachers Develop Academic Momentum with Reluctant Students Part B. Instructional Strategies 20. Teaching for Deep Learning 21. Improve Your Verbal Questioning 22. Designing Learning through Learning to Design 23. Using Engagement Strategies to Facilitate Children’s Learning and Success 24. Meeting the Needs of All Students through Differentiated Instruction: Helping Every Child Reach and Exceed Standards 25. What’s Right about Looking at What’s Wrong? Unit 5: Motivation and Classroom Management Part A. Motivation 26. Convincing Students They Can Learn to Read: Crafting SelfEfficacy Prompts 27. Why We Can’t Always Get What We Want 28. How to Produce a High-Achieving Child 29. How Can Students Be Motivated: A Misplaced Question? 30. The Perils and Promises of Praise 31. Should Learning Be Its Own Reward? Part B. Classroom Management 32. Strategies for Effective Classroom Management in the Secondary Setting 33. “No! I Won’t! “ 34. Bullying: Effective Strategies for Its Prevention 35. Cyberbullying: What School Adminstrators (and Parents) Can Do 36. IOSIE: A Method for Analyzing Student Behavioral Problems 37. Middle School Students Talk about Social Forces in the Classroom 38. An Early Warning System Unit 6: Assessment 39. Mismatch: When State Standards and Tests Don’t Mesh, Schools Are Left Grinding Their Gears 40. Assessment through the Students’ Eyes 41. Testing the Joy out of Learning 42. Feedback That Fits 43. The Proficiency Illusion Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
Educational Testing Service 2010 / 496 pages ISBN: 9780071626606
[A Professional Reference Title] The Praxis Series: The Official Guide comes straight from Educational Testing Service (ETS)--the people who make the test. If you need to take these state-mandated teacher licensing exams, this book gives you complete information about the entire Praxis series. This book includes a complete Praxis I: PPST exam review. Six full-length, authentic PPST tests are provided in the book and also in interactive format on CD-ROM. You will also find authoritative information about the Praxis II Subject Assessments, the Principles of Learning and Teaching (PLT) exam, and much more. CONTENTS How to Use This Book PART I. GETTING STARTED Chapter 1. Introducing the Praxis Chapter 2. Praxis Practical Matters Chapter 3. General Strategies for Test-Takers PART II. PREPARING FOR THE PPST Chapter 4. All About the PPST Chapter 5. PPST Reading Chapter 6. PPST Mathematics Chapter 7. PPST Writing: The Multiple-Choice Section Chapter 8. PPST Writing: The Essay PART III. SIX REAL PPSTs FOR PRACTICE Chapter 9. PPST: Reading Test 1 Chapter 10. PPST: Reading Test 2 Chapter 11. PPST: Mathematics Test 1 Chapter 12. PPST: Mathematics Test 2 Chapter 13. PPST: Writing Test 1 Chapter 14. PPST: Writing Test 2 PART IV. PRINCIPLES OF LEARNING AND TEACHING (PLT) Chapter 15. All About the PLT Tests Chapter 16. Real PLT Questions for Practice PART V. PRAXIS II: ELEMENTARY EDUCATION Chapter 17. Elementary Education: Curriculum, Instruction, and Assessment Chapter 18. Elementary Education: Content Knowledge Chapter 19. Elementary Education: Content Area Exercises PART VI. PRAXIS II: SUBJECT ASSESSMENTS Chapter 20. All About the Subject Assessments Chapter 21. Reading, English, Language Arts Chapter 22. Social Studies, Math, Science Chapter 23. Other Subjects Appendix A: State-by-State Certification Testing Requirements Appendix B: For More Information
49
Educational Psychology
Infants & Toddlers
Child, Family & Society – Readers
INFANTS, TODDLERS, AND CAREGIVERS A Curriculum of Respectful, Responsive Care and Education 8th Edition
NEW
*9780078127571*
Janet Gonzalez-Mena, Napa Valley College Dianne Widmeyer Eyer, Canada College 2009 / 400 pages ISBN: 9780073378541 ISBN: 9780071285452 [IE]
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY 8th Edition Diana S Del Campo and Robert L Del Campo of New Mexico State University-Las Cruces 2010 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780078127571 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/gonzalezitc8e Combining a child-centered philosophy with problem-solving strategies, and a thorough discussion of diversity, Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers serves as an ideal introduction to curriculum and care for infants and toddlers. The approach to caregiving that underlies the text is based on Magda Gerber’s philosophy combined with a bold new approach to the extensive 62 years of research done by her late colleague, Emmi Pikler. Focusing on the concept of respect in child care, both pioneers based their curriculum around responding to each individual child’s needs in a warm and sensitive manner. Stressing the need for physical and social growth through planned and unplanned learning exercises, Gerber and Pikler’s approach to childcare aims to develop the mental, physical, and emotional progress of each child. In addition to the new approach to Pikler’s research, the new edition features expanded discussions on race, natural environments and exercise for children. Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers applies this approach in a practical and engaging way for students and faculty in introductory early childhood courses.
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127572.mhtml Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
CONTENTS Preface Resources for Caregivers PART I. FOCUS ON THE CAREGIVER 1. Principles, Practice, and Curriculum 2. Infant-Toddler Education 3. Caregiving as Curriculum 4. Play as Curriculum PART II. FOCUS ON THE CHILD 5. Attachment 6. Perception 7. Motor Skills 8. Cognition 9. Language 10. Emotions 11. Social Skills PART III.: FOCUS ON THE PROGRAM 12. The Physical Environment 13. The Social Environment 14. Adult Relations in Infant-Toddler Care and Education Programs Appendix A: Quality in Infant-Toddler Programs: A Checklist Appendix B: Environmental Chart Appendix C: Guiding Principles of the Parent Services Projects Notes References Glossary Credits Index
50
Educational Psychology
Death and Dying
NEW
*9780078127670* THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH AND DYING 8th Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, AND BEREAVEMENT 09/10 11th Edition
Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College and Albert Lee Strickland 2009 / Hardcover / 688 pages ISBN: 9780073405469 Available: July 2008
George E Dickinson, College of Charleston Michael R Leming, Saint Olaf College
www.mhhe.com/despelder8e
2010 / Softcover / 224 pages ISBN: 9780078127670 Available: March 2009
The best-selling textbook in the field, The Last Dance offers an interdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying. Integrating the experiential, scholarly, social, individual, emotional, and intellectual dimensions of death and dying, the eighth edition of this acclaimed text has been thoroughly revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensive coverage of death studies. Together with its companion volumes, this new edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory and research, as well as practical application to students’ lives.
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change Chapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of Sociocultural Forces Chapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and Historical Chapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and Institutions Chapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public Policy Chapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness Chapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and Decisions Chapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss Chapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition Chapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents Chapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults Chapter 12 – Suicide Chapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern World Chapter 14 – Beyond Death / After Life Chapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices
NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Dying_Death_and Bereavement_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by DeSpelder/Strickland. CONTENTS Unit 1: Issues in Dying and Death 1. Death, Dying, and the Dead in Popular Culture 2. Dealing with the Dead Patient at the Intensive Care Unit 3. How Much Is More Life Worth?, 4. Confronting Death: Perceptions of a Good Death in Adults with Lung Cancer 5. Estimating Excess Mortality in Post-Invasion Iraq 6. The Sociology of Death Unit 2: Dying and Death across the Life Cycle 7. Rituals of Unburdening 8. To Live with No Regrets 9. ‘’Cast Me Not Off in Old Age’’ 10. Caregiving Systems at the End of Life: How Informal Caregivers and Formal Providers Collaborate 11. Needs of Elderly Patients in Palliative Care 12. Altered States: What I’ve Learned about Death & Disability 13. Life after Death Unit 3: The Dying Process 14. The Comfort Connection 15. Are They Hallucinations or Are They Real? The Spirituality of Deathbed and Near-Death Visions 16. Dying on the Streets: Homeless Persons’ Concerns and Desires about End-of-Life Care
51
Educational Psychology 17. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns toward Dying in Prison Unit 4: Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide 18. Death and the Law 19. What Living Wills Won’t Do: The Limits of Autonomy 20. Ethics and Life’s Ending: An Exchange 21. Suicidal Thoughts among College Students More Common than Expected 22. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame Unit 5: Funerals 23. The Tuneful Funeral 24. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects 25. The Arlington Ladies 26. Green Graveyards—A Natural Way to Go 27. Social Workers’ Final Act of Service: Respectful Burial Arrangements for Indigent, Unclaimed, and Unidentified People Unit 6: Bereavement 28. The Grieving Process 29. Disenfranchised Grief 30. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief 31. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning: The Onslaught Is Just Beginning 32. Life Is Like the Seasons 33. Counseling with Children in Contemporary Society Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
52
53
DEVELOPMENT AND PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY SOCIAL ENGLISH
Advanced Social Psychology .............................................................................58 Attitudes and Behavior .......................................................................................57 Health Psychology ..............................................................................................62 Interpersonal Relations.......................................................................................62 Intimacy ..............................................................................................................59 Motivation and Emotion ......................................................................................63 Personality ..........................................................................................................57 Psychology of Prejudice .....................................................................................62 Psychology of Women and Gender ....................................................................60 Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader ....................................................60 Social Psychology – Texts ..................................................................................55 Social Psychology – Readers .............................................................................56
NEW TITLES SOCIAL AND PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
ISBN
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Personality Psychology
Newman
9780078050008
58
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 5e
White
9780078049941
60
Interpersonal Conflict, 8e
Wilmot
9780073385136
62
Annual Editions: Gender 10/11
Hutchison
9780078050527
60
Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature, 4e
Larsen
9780073370682
57
Social Psychology, 10e
Myers
9780073370668
55
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3e
Nier
9780078139413
56
Psychology of Success, 5e
Waitley
9780073375175
63
Page
2010
54
Social and Personality Psychology
Social Psychology – Texts
Part Two: Social Influence Chapter 5: Genes, Culture, and Gender Chapter 6: Conformity and Obedience Chapter 7: Persuasion Chapter 8: Group Influence Part Three: Social Relations Chapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking others Chapter 10: Aggression: Hurting Others Chapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving Others Chapter 12: Helping Chapter 13: Conflict and Peacemaking Part Four: Applying Social Psychology Chapter 14: Social Psychology in the Clinic Chapter 15: Social Psychology in Court Chapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future Epilogue
NEW
*9780073370668* SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 10th Edition David Myers, Hope College 2010 / 752 pages ISBN: 9780073370668 ISBN: 9780071220002 [IE] Available: November 2009
International Edition
www.mhhe.com/myers10e
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 5th Edition
Reflecting your students and their world. How many of the students in your Social Psychology course are Psychology majors? Business? Sociology? Education? In the 10th edition of Social Psychology, David Myers once again weaves an inviting and compelling narrative that speaks to ALL of your students regardless of background or intended major. Through examples and applications as well as marginal quotations from across the breadth of the liberal arts and sciences, Myers draws students into the field of social psychology. At the same time, Myers is also in tune with the ever-changing state of social psychology research. Boasting over 650 new citations in the 10th edition, Social Psychology is as current as it is captivating. Research Close-Up and Inside Story features throughout the book provide deeper exposure to key research and researchers. Marginal quotations, examples and applications throughout each chapter, and the concluding “Applying Social Psychology” chapters all ensure that regardless of your students’ interests and future plans, Social Psychology will engage them. This 10th edition also features the contributions of Jean Twenge, author of Generation Me and The Narcissism Epidemic, further bolstering the direct connection to today’s students.
Stephen L Franzoi, Marquette University 2009 / Hardcover / 648 pages ISBN: 9780073370590 ISBN: 9780071285438 [IE] Available: October 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/franzoi5 Readable research. This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self” as a theme to give students a meaningful context for exploring the key concepts of social psychology. “Applications” sections have been incorporated into most chapters, and “Featured Study” sections at the end of every chapter summarize the purpose, method, and results of recently published scientific articles. Retaining the emphasis on methodology, the text also continues the tradition of strong gender coverage, while expanding the coverage of social cognition and social neuroscience.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
CONTENTS
v Research that reflects what we currently know about the world of social psychology. With over 650 new citations, Social Psychology presents the state of the field as it stands today. As always, Myers presents this research in meaningful and digestible ways that promise to engage all students.
Chapter 1 Introducing Social Psychology Chapter 2 Conducting Research in Social Psychology Chapter 3 The Self Chapter 4 Social Cognition and Person Perception Chapter 5 Attitudes and Persuasion Chapter 6 Stereotyping, Prejudice, and Discrimination Chapter 7 Social Influence Chapter 8--Group Behavior Chapter 9 Interpersonal Attraction Chapter 10 Intimate Relationships Chapter 11 Aggression Chapter 12 Prosocial Behavior: Helping Others
v Guest contributions reflect topics of particular interest to today’s students. New to the 10th edition, Jean Twenge has contributed to Chapter 2, “The Self in a Social World.” Drawing on her extensive knowledge and research on the self and cultural changes, the author of Generation Me and The Narcissism Epidemic collaborated on the revision of this chapter. v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Social_ Psychology_3e.pdf v This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3/e with the corresponding chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Social Psychology textbooks by Franzoi and Myers et al. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introducing Social Psychology Part One: Social Thinking Chapter 2: The Self in a Social World Chapter 3: Social Beliefs and Judgments Chapter 4: Behavior and Attitudes
55
Social and Personality Psychology
Social Psychology – Readers
International Edition EXPLORING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 5th Edition David Myers, Hope College 2009 / Softcover / 528 pages ISBN: 9780073370644 ISBN: 9780071280426 [IE] Available: October 2008
NEW
*9780078139413*
http://www.mhhe.com/myersesp5 This brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers streamlined focus on issues such as belief and illusion, prejudice and diversity, and love and hate. The brevity of each of the book’s 31 stand-alone modules makes this the perfect text for covering the core concepts in the field. By introducing social psychology in an essay format and by writing in a voice that is both solidly scientific and warmly human, Exploring Social Psychology is able to reveal social psychology as an investigative reporter might, by providing a current summary of important social phenomena, by showing how social psychologists uncover and explain such phenomena, and by reflecting on their human significance. The new edition includes discussion of the Hurricane Katrina aftermath as an illustration of hindsight bias and availability heuristic, the Iraq War and belief perseverance, and terrorism and group polarization.
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3rd Edition Jason A Nier, Connecticut College 2010 / 432 Pages ISBN: 9780078139413 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078139414.mhtml Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
CONTENTS Part One Introducing Social Psychology Module 1 Doing Social Psychology Module 2 Did You Know It All Along? Part Two Social Thinking Module 3 Self-Concept: Who Am I? Module 4 Self-Serving Bias Module 5 The Power of Positive Thinking Module 6 The Fundamental Attribution Error Module 7 The Powers and Perils of Intuition Module 8 Reasons for Unreason Module 9 Behavior and Belief Module 10 Clinical Intuition Module 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social Cognition Part Three Social Influence Module 12 Human Nature and Cultural Diversity Module 13 Gender, Genes, and Culture Module 14 How Nice People Get Corrupted Module 15 Two Routes to Persuasion Module 16 Indoctrination and Inoculation Module 17 The Mere Presence of Others Module 18 Many Hands Make Diminished Responsibility Module 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do Alone Module 20 How Groups Intensify Decisions Module 21 Power to the Person Part Four Social Relations Module 22 The Challenge of Diversity Module 23 The Roots of Prejudice Module 24 The Nature and Nurture of Aggression Module 25 Does the Media Influence Social Behavior? Module 26 Who Likes Whom? Module 27 The Ups and Downs of Love Module 28 Causes of Conflict Module 29 Blessed Are the Peacemakers Module 30 When Do People Help? Module 31 Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future References Art Credits Name Index Subject Index
NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Social_ Psychology_3e.pdf v This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3/e with the corresponding chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Social Psychology textbooks by Franzoi and Myers et al. CONTENTS Unit 1 Ethical Issues in Social Psychology Issue 1. Is Deception of Human Participants Ethical? Issue 2. Should Social Psychologists Try to Solve Social Problems? Issue 3. Can Experimental Social Psychology and Social Constructionism co-exist? Unit 2 Social Cognition Issue 4. Are Our Social Perceptions Often Inaccurate? Issue 5. Does Cognitive Dissonance Explain Why Behavior Can Change Attitudes? Issue 6. Are Self-Esteem Programs Misguided? Issue 7. Can People Accurately Detect Lies? Issue 8. Are Repressed Memories Real? Issue 9. Do Positive Illusions Lead to Healthy Behavior? Unit 3 Social Influence Issue 10. Do Milgram’s Obedience Experiments Help Explain the Nature of the Holocaust? Issue 11. Does the Stanford Prison Experiment Help Explain the Effects of Imprisonment? Issue 12. Is Subliminal Persuasion a Myth? Issue 13. Can People Really Be Brainwashed? Unit 4 Social Relations Issue 14. Is Stereotyping Inevitable?
56
Social and Personality Psychology
Personality
Issue 15. Does the Implicit Association Test (IAT) Measure Racial Prejudice? Issue 16. Should Social Psychologists Study the Accuracy of Stereotypes? Issue 17. Does True Altruism Exist? Issue 18. Does Media Violence Cause Aggression?
*9780073370682* NEW International Edition
Attitudes and Behavior
PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature 4th Edition
MULTICULTURAL PSYCHOLOGY 2nd Edition Jeffrey Scott Mio, Lori Barker Hackett and Jaydee Tumambing 2009 / Softcover / 384 pages ISBN: 9780073382715 Available: June 2008
Randy J Larsen, Washington University-St Louis David M Buss, University of Texas at Austin 2010 / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073370682 ISBN: 9780070164994 [IE] Available: November 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/mio2e
www.mhhe.com/larsen4e
In this thoroughly updated revision of Multicultural Psychology, the authors once again use their own personal stories and experiences along with those of students as a means of entry to scientific and professional writing on multicultural psychology. In doing so, they engage students in the presentation of quantitative and qualitative research on multicultural issues while capturing the richness of diverse cultures. The text focuses on compelling topics such as differences in worldviews and communication; racial/cultural identity development; issues of racism; immigration; and nonracial populations of diversity, such as gender, sexuality, age, and ability. The authors integrate issues specific to populations of diversity throughout the chapters, as opposed to covering such issues in distinct chapters.
Using a novel organizational framework, one that emphasizes domains of knowledge about human nature, this trusted text presents the field of contemporary personality psychology as a collection of interrelated topics and themes. The emphasis, as always, is on the scientific basis of understanding human nature. The fourth edition continues to answer the needs of instructors by covering topics that do not fit into the framework of theory-based texts. It features updates on cutting edge trends in personality psychology in relation to culture, gender, evolution, genetics, emotion, self, health psychology, and personality disorders, while providing a solid foundation in the more traditional areas of trait psychology, psychoanalysis, and cognitive and social approaches to personality. Presented in a colorful and accessible format, the provides exercises, personality questionnaires, “Closer Look” boxes, current news boxes, and many charts, graphs, and photos to engage students in the material.
CONTENTS Chapter 1—Introduction Chapter 2—Research and Testing Chapter 3—Cultural Equivalence Chapter 4—Communication Chapter 5—Acculturation Chapter 6—Racism Chapter 7—Racial Identity Development Chapter 8—Health Chapter 9—Mental Health Chapter 10—Wrapping it All Up
NEW TO THIS EDITION v Reflects the latest and most up-to-date research on topics such as genetics, theories of personality, contemporary views of the unconscious, cognitive social learning, self-esteem, culture, and gender. v Provides major updates on correlates of personality dimensions includes new material on neuroticism, extraversion, agreeableness, and conscientiousness. v Includes new information about research on the effects of personality on religiosity and spirituality later in life, the heritability of self-esteem, a meta-analysis of D4 receptor (DRD4) genes linked with sensation seeking, evolution of group living and social motivation, and self-recognition in animals. CONTENTS Introduction 1. Introduction to Personality Psychology 2. Personality Assessment, Measurement, and Research Design Part I: The Dispositional Domain 3. Traits and Trait Taxonomies 4. Theoretical and Measurement Issues in Trait Psychology 5. Personality Dispositions over Time: Stability, Change, and Coherence Part II: The Biological Domain 6. Genetics and Personality 7. Physiological Approaches to Personality 8. Evolutionary Perspectives on Personality Part III: The Intrapsychic Domain 9. Psychoanalytic Approaches to Personality 10. Psychoanalytic Approaches: Contemporary Issues
57
Social and Personality Psychology 11. Motives and Personality Part IV: The Cognitive/Experiential Domain 12. Cognitive Topics in Personality 13. Emotion and Personality 14. Approaches to the Self Part V: The Social and Cultural Domain 15. Personality and Social Interaction 16. Sex, Gender, and Personality 17. Culture and Personality Part VI: The Adjustment Domain 18. Stress, Coping, Adjustment, and Health 19. Disorders of Personality Conclusion 20. Summary and Future Directions
NEW
*9780078050008* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY Laurel Conway Newman, Fontbonne University Randy J Larsen, Washington University-St Louis 2011 / 448 pages ISBN: 9780078050008 Available: March 2010
www.mhhe.com/takingsides Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
International Edition THEORIES OF PERSONALITY 7th Edition Jess Feist, Mcneese State University Geogory Feist, College of William Mary 2009 / 592 pages ISBN: 9780073382708 ISBN: 9780071263450 [IE] Available: July 2008
Advanced Social Psychology
http://www.mhhe.com/feist7 The 7th edition of this trusted introduction to personality centers on the premise that personality theories are a reflection of the unique cultural background, family experiences, personalities, and professional training of their originators. The book begins by acquainting students with the meaning of personality and providing them with a solid foundation for understanding the nature of theory, as well as its crucial contributions to science. The chapters that follow present twentythree major theories: coverage of each theory also encompasses a biographical sketch of each theorist, related research, and applications to real life. The primary focus of this revision was updating the theory chapters to reflect the most recent research.
International Edition SOCIAL COGNITION, FROM BRAINS TO CULTURE Susan T Fiske, University of Massachusetts, Amherst Shelley E Taylor, University of California-Los Angeles 2008 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073405520 ISBN: 9780071284868 [IE] Available: October 2007
CONTENTS Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Introduction to Personality Theory Part II: Psychodynamic Theories Chapter 2: Freud: Psychoanalysis Chapter 3: Adler: Individual Psychology Chapter 4: Jung: Analytical Psychology Chapter 5: Klein: Object Relations Theory Chapter 6: Horney: Psychoanalytic Social Theory Chapter 7: Fromm: Humanistic Psychoanalysis Chapter 8: Sullivan: Interpersonal Theory Chapter 9: Erikson: Post-Freudian Theory Part III: Humanistic/Existential Theories Chapter 10: Maslow: Holistic-Dynamic Theory Chapter 11: Rogers: Person-Centered Theory Chapter 12: May: Existential Psychology Part IV: Dispositional Theories Chapter 13: Allport: Psychology of the Individual Chapter 14: Eysenck, McCrae, and Costa’s Factor and Trait Theories Part V: Learning Theories Chapter 15: Skinner: Behavioral Analysis Chapter 16: Bandura: Social Cognitive Theory Chapter 17: Rotter and Mischel: Cognitive Social Learning Theory Chapter 18: Kelly: Psychology of Personal Constructs
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fisketaylor This exciting new version of the classic text, Social Cognition, describes the increasingly complete link between neuropsychology and culture. Highlighting the cutting-edge research in social neuropsychology, mainstream experimental social-cognitive psychology, and cultural psychology, it retains the authors’ unique ability to be both scholarly and entertaining. Reader-friendly style and concise summaries combine with the authors’ engaging perspectives on this flourishing field. Comprehensive without being overwhelming, this new standard for the field brings with it a new organization reflecting current consensus open issues of the field, and its trajectory into the future. CONTENTS 1. Introduction a. Approaches to Studying the Social Thinker b. Ebb & Flow of Cognition in Psychology & Neuroscience c. What is Social Cognition? d. People Are Not Things e. Culture Matters f. Brains Matter g. Summary Basic Concepts in Social Cognition 2. Dual-Modes a. Automaticity
58
Social and Personality Psychology b. Control c. Motivations that Moderate Modes d. Models of Both Automatic and Controlled Processes e. Single-Mode Alternatives f. Summary 3. Attention and Encoding: What Gets into Our Heads a. Salience: A Property of Stimuli in Context b. Vividness: An Inherent Property of Stimuli c. Accessibility: A Property of Categories in Our Heads d. Direct Perception: Not Just in Our Heads e. Faces: The focus of social attention f. Summary g. Unfinished business: 4. Representation in Memory a. Models of Memory b. Social Memory Structures: Why Social Memory Matters c. Summary d. Unfinished business: e. How Social Memory Matters Topics in Social Cognition: From Self to Society 5. Self a. Mental representation of the Self b. Culture and the Self c. Self-Regulation d. Motivation and Self-Regulation e. Self as a Reference Point (ck Ochsner, Kelley, Heatherton) 6. Causal Attribution Processes a. What is Attribution Theory? b. Attribution Theory: The Empirical Legacy c. Attributional Biases d. Summary 7. Heuristics a. Introduction to heuristics b. When do heuristics lead to the wrong answers? c. Judgments over time d. Accuracy-efficiency trade-off in perspective e. Summary 8. Cognitive Approaches to Attitudes & Evaluations (in progress) a. Background b. Cognitive features of two consistency theories c. Types of attitude processing d. Cognitive analyses of attitudes within social contexts e. Attitude change and the self f. Summary 9. Stereotyping: A Central Topic in Social Cognition a. Introduction b. Blatant stereotypes c. Subtle stereotypes d. Effects of bias e. Summary 10. Prejudice: Interplay of Cogntive and Affective Biases (in progress) a. Introduction b. Intergroup emotions c. Special case of Race & Ethnicity d. Prejudice: Special case of Gender e. Special case of Age f. Special case of heterosexism g. Summary 11. Mood & Emotions (in progress) a. Differentiating among affects, preferences, evaluations, moods b. Early theories c. Physiological theories of emotion d. Social foundations of affect e. Affective influences on cognition f. Affect versus cognition g. Summary 12. Behavior and cognition a. Self regulation revisited b. How is cognition related to behavior? c. When are cognitions and behavior related?
d. Using behavior to test hypotheses about others e. Summary 13. Conclusion
Intimacy INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS 5th Edition Rowland Miller, Sam Houston State University Daniel Perlman Sharon Stephens Brehm 2009 / Softcover / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073370187 Available: November 2008
www.mhhe.com/millerint5e Miller’s 5th edition of Intimate Relationships retains all of the qualities that made the trusted text a best seller, with a new organization that makes the material accessible to students. The text has engaging, accessible prose, a comprehensive reach across disciplines, vigorous standards of scholarship, and a personal appeal in its subject matter. The new edition is more concise with two newreorganized chapters, but still packed with new developments and current research woven into every chapter. The authors illustrate the relevance of relationship science to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and analysis. This lively, comprehensive, user-friendly text provides students with the tools they need to succeed in this course. CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to the Study of Intimate Relationships Chapter 1: The Building Blocks of Relationships Chapter 2: Research Methods Part 2: Getting Together and Basic Processes in Intimate Relationships Chapter 3: Attraction Chapter 4: Social Cognition Chapter 5: Communication Chapter 6: Interdependency Part 3 Friendship and Intimacy Chapter 7: Friendships Chapter 8: Love Chapter 9: Sexuality Part 4 Relationship Issues Chapter 10: Stresses and Strains Chapter 11: Conflict Chapter 12: Power and Violence Part 5 Losing and Enhancing Relationships Chapter 13: The Dissolution and Loss of Relationships Chapter 14: Maintaining and Repairing Relationships
59
Social and Personality Psychology
Psychology of Women and Gender
Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader
NEW
International Edition
*9780078049941* WOMEN AND GENDER: A FEMINIST PSYCHOLOGY 4th Edition
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER 5th Edition
Mary Crawford, University of Connecticut—Storrs and Rhoda Unger, Brandeis University 2004 / Softcover / 656 pages ISBN: 9780072821079 ISBN: 9780071216616 [IE]
Jacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro 2011 / 416 pages ISBN: 9780078049941 Available: March 2010
CONTENTS
[Details unavailable at press time]
www.mhhe.com/takingsides
Preface 1. Introduction to a Feminist Psychology of Women 2. Images of Women and Men 3. Doing Gender 4. The Meanings of Difference 5. Biology, Sex, and Gender 6. Becoming Gendered: Childhood Acquiring Gender: A Developmental Perspective 7. Becoming a Woman: Puberty and Adolescence 8. Sex, Love, and Romance 9. Commitments: Women and Close Relationships 10. Mothering 11. Work and Achievement 12. Midlife and Beyond 13. Violence Against Women 14. Mental and Physical Health 15. Making a Difference: Toward a Better Future for Women
NEW
*9780078050527* ANNUAL EDITIONS: GENDER 10/11 Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages ISBN: 9780078050527 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078050529.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Theoretical and Research Perspectives 1. The Social Construction of Gender 2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social Relations 3. Gender Is Powerful: The Long Reach of Feminism 4. The World, the Flesh and the Devil 5. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women
60
Social and Personality Psychology TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER 4th Edition
6. Beauty, Gender and Stereotypes: Evidence from Laboratory Experiments 7. I’m Not a Very Manly Man: Qualitative Insights into Young Men’s Masculine Subjectivity UNIT 2: Gender and Development 8. Gender and Group Process: A Developmental Perspective 9. Gender Bender 10. The Secret Lives of Single Women 11. Goodbye to Girlhood, 12. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior 13. How Many Fathers Are Best for a Child? 14. What Autistic Girls Are Made of UNIT 3: Gender and Education 15. Learning and Gender 16. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development 17. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating Gender-Friendly Middle School Classrooms 18. Female Faculty in Male-Dominated Fields: Law, Medicine, and Engineering 19. Scaling the Ivory Towers UNIT 4: Gender, Work, and Health Part A. Gender and Work 20. The Emperor’s New Woes 21. The Media Depiction of Women Who Opt Out 22. Great Expectations 23. Labor Markets, Breadwinning, and Beliefs: How Economic Context Shapes Men’s Gender Ideology Part B. Gender and Health 24. A Woman’s Curse? 25. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Females and Males: Risk and Resilience 26. When Sex Hurts 27. Health Behaviors, Prostate Cancer, and Masculinities: A Life Course Perspective UNIT 5: Genders and Sexualities 28. (Rethinking) Gender 29. Progress and Politics in the Intersex Rights Movement: Feminist Theory in Action 30. What Do Women Want? 31. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the More They Stay the Same 32. Peer Marriage 33. State of Our Unions: Marriage Promotion and the Contested Power of Heterosexuality 34. Five Years on, Gay Marriage Debate Fades in Massachusetts 35. Everyone’s Queer 36. The Berdache Tradition 37. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents UNIT 6: Gender and Social Issues 38. Flower Grandma’s Secret 39. Sexual Assault on Campus: What Colleges and Universities Are Doing about It 40. Male Rape Myths: The Role of Gender, Violence, and Sexism 41. Effects of Sexual Assaults on Men: Physical, Mental, and Sexual Consequences 42. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution 43. Fall Girls 44. Women, Citizens, Muslims 45. Beyond Hillary: Strength in Numbers Ann Friedman Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
Jacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro 2009 / Softcover / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073515298 Available: March 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtml This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to controversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent the arguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators, reflect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their liveliness and substance and because of their value in a debate framework. Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally and politically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKING SIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts, presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and public discourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills by analyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments. The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what is gender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover that what might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is so much more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only) accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have been provided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teaching suggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teaching hints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion around the themes raised by the clashing essays. CONTENTS Unit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving Target Issue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny? Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate? Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and Sciences Have a Biological Basis? Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of Difference Issue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different? Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and Men Innately Determined? Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responses to Stress Gender-Based? Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and Men Issue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender? Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levels of Violence Against Intimate Partners? Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape? Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender in Childhood Issue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry? Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parents for Children? Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being? Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society? Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of Work Issue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) Improve Women’s Lives? Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in the Workplace? Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified? Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to Societal Obstacles? Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards? Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong? Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message to Teens? Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional Gender Constraints?
61
Social and Personality Psychology
Health Psychology
Interpersonal Relations
NEW
International Edition
*9780073385136*
HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY 7th Edition
INTERPERSONAL CONFLICT 8th Edition
Shelley Taylor, University of California-Los Angeles 2009 / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073382722 ISBN: 9780071270311 [IE] Available: June 2008
William W Wilmot, University of Montana Joyce L Hocker 2011 / 384 pages ISBN: 9780073385136 Available: January 2010
http://www.mhhe.com/taylorhealth7e
http://www.mhhe.com/wilmot8e
The seventh edition of Health Psychology highlights health issues that face the college student and his or her family through both accessible research examples and profiles of interventions. It also highlights health issues relevant to the college student’s immediate and global environment with both accessible research examples and profiles of interventions. This edition contains clear descriptions on current research into the prevention, treatment, and causes (social, genetic, and biological) of health related disorders.
[Details unavailable at press time]
Psychology of Prejudice
CONTENTS Part One--Introduction to Health Psychology Chapter 1 -What Is Health Psychology? Chapter 2--The Systems of the Body Part Two--Health Behavior and Primary Prevention Chapter 3--Health Behaviors Chapter 4--Specific Health Related Behaviors Chapter 5--Health-Compromising Behaviors: Alcoholism and Smoking Part Three--Stress and Coping Chapter 6--Stress Chapter 7--Moderators of the Stress Experience Part Four--The Patient in the Treatment Setting Chapter 8--Using Health Services Chapter 9--Patient-Provider Relations Chapter 10--The Management of Pain and Discomfort Part Five--Management of Chronic and Terminal Illness Chapter 11--Management of Chronic Illness Chapter 12--Psychological Issues in Advancing and Terminal Illness Chapter 13--Heart Disease, Hypertension, Stroke, and Diabetes Chapter 14--Psychoneuroimmunology, AIDS, Cancer, and Arthritis Part Six--Toward the Future Chapter 15--Health Psychology: Challenges for the Future Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
MULTICULTURAL PSYCHOLOGY 2nd Edition Jeffrey Scott Mio, Lori Barker Hackett and Jaydee Tumambing 2009 / Softcover / 384 pages ISBN: 9780073382715 Available: June 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/mio2e In this thoroughly updated revision of Multicultural Psychology, the authors once again use their own personal stories and experiences along with those of students as a means of entry to scientific and professional writing on multicultural psychology. In doing so, they engage students in the presentation of quantitative and qualitative research on multicultural issues while capturing the richness of diverse cultures. The text focuses on compelling topics such as differences in worldviews and communication; racial/cultural identity development; issues of racism; immigration; and nonracial populations of diversity, such as gender, sexuality, age, and ability. The authors integrate issues specific to populations of diversity throughout the chapters, as opposed to covering such issues in distinct chapters. CONTENTS Chapter 1—Introduction Chapter 2—Research and Testing Chapter 3—Cultural Equivalence Chapter 4—Communication Chapter 5—Acculturation Chapter 6—Racism Chapter 7—Racial Identity Development Chapter 8—Health Chapter 9—Mental Health Chapter 10—Wrapping it All Up
62
Social and Personality Psychology
Motivation and Emotion
NEW
*9780073375175* PSYCHOLOGY OF SUCCESS 5th Edition Denis Waitley
2010 / Softcover / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073375175 Available: February 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/waitley5e Psychology of Success defines the fundamental psychology principles of success—principles applicable to everyone regardless of age, major, background or specialty. Unlike many books, Psychology of Success doesn’t take a one-size-fits-all approach; rather it asks students to take an active role in defining what is right for them as an individual. It calls on students to use self-awareness and critical thinking to examine their dreams, values, interests, skills, needs, identities, self-esteem, and relationships and to set and achieve goals based on their personal vision of success. It introduces key concepts of psychology and offers creative exercises designed to help students understand these concepts and apply them to their lives. A workbook as well as a textbook, Psychology of Success offers simple yet effective strategies for self-improvement. NEW TO THIS EDITION v New full-color design and larger, stream-lined layout accommodate the useful features and application-oriented theme of this text. v Internet Action boxes and end-of-chapter Internet Activities are updated to include the latest topics and online materials, which are linked at the book’s Online Learning Center site at www.mhhe.com/waitley5e. v Discussions of gender and diversity have been updated to more appropriately address today’s student. v Applying Psychology boxes are updated where necessary to reflect the latest research and thinking. v Further Readings and references to other materials are updated to include the latest books on personal psychology and self-help and reflection. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Psychology and Success. Chapter 2: Self-Awareness. Chapter 3: Goals and Obstacles. Chapter 4: Self-Esteem. Chapter 5: Positive Thinking. Chapter 6: Self-Discipline. Chapter 7: Self-Motivation. Chapter 8: Managing Your Resources. Chapter 9: Communication and Relationships. Further Reading Glossary Index
63
Social and Personality Psychology
64
65
DEVELOPMENT PSYCHOLOGY CLINICAL ENGLISH
Abnormal Psychology .........................................................................................67 Abnormal Psychology – Readers .......................................................................68 Counseling..........................................................................................................69 Developmental Psychopathology .......................................................................72 Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ...........................................................................69 Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers ..........................................................70
NEW TITLES CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 10/11, 25e
Wilson
9780078050664
70
Drugs in Perspective, 7e
Fields
9780073380759
69
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Drugs and Society, 9e
Goldberg
9780078127564
70
Abnormal Psychology: Clinical Perspectives on Psychological Disorders, 6e
Halgin
9780073370699
67
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10, 24e
Wilson
9780078127632
71
ISBN
Page
2010
66
Clinical Psychology
Abnormal Psychology
Chapter 15--Ethical and Legal Issues Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
*9780073370699* NEW International Edition
International Edition ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY Clinical Perspectives on Psychological Disorders 6th Edition
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY MEDIA AND RESEARCH UPDATE WITH MINDMAP 4th Edition Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, Yale University 2008 / Hardcover with CD-ROM ISBN: 9780077236397 ISBN: 9780071284318 [IE]
Richard P Halgin and Susan Krauss Whitbourne of University of Mass-Amherst 2010 / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073370699 ISBN: 9780070165076 [IE] Available: January 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/nolen4 Authored by award-winning teacher and noted researcher Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, this text blends cutting-edge research in psychopathology with compassion for people who suffer from psychological disorders. Capturing the excitement of major advances in biological and psychosocial research and treatment alternatives, Abnormal Psychology Media and Research Update imparts a true enthusiasm for and appreciation of scientific investigation. The author’s scientific and caring approach, combined with strong study tools, has won accolades from instructors and students alike. This Media and Research Update includes Faces Interactive Case Studies, which link information about disorders covered in the text to Face Interactive Online, integrating the audio visual resources to the written text. The text continues to place great emphasis on an integrated approach to abnormal psychology, on making biological information clear to students, and on providing a strong focus on empirical research and diversity.
http://www.mhhe.com/halgin6e Presenting the Human Experience of Psychological Disorders. In Richard Halgin and Susan Krauss Whitbourne’s Abnormal Psychology: Clinical Perspectives on Psychological Disorders, students are shown the human side of Abnormal Psychology. Through the widespread use of current and highly relevant clinical case studies, the biographies and first-person quotations in the Real Stories feature, and the unique case media program Faces Interactive Online, students are presented with real-life portrayals of the disorders featured in the text. The new sixth edition includes updated research coverage and increased pedagogy, designed to maximize student comprehension. The text maintains the integrative approach to treatment using the biopsychosocial model, the lifespan approach, and the succinct coverage that have been the foundations of the text’s success.
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
1. Looking at Abnormality 2. Contemporary Theories of Abnormality 3. The Research Endeavor 4. Assessing and Diagnosing Abnormality 5. Treatments for Abnormality 6. Stress Disorders and Health Psychology 7. Anxiety Disorders 8. Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders 9. Mood Disorders 10. Suicide 11. Schizophrenia 12. Personality Disorders 13. Childhood Disorders 14. Cognitive Disorders and Life-Span Issues 15. Eating Disorders 16. Sexual Disorders 17. Substance-Related Disorders 18. Mental Health and the Law Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
v Increased Pedagogy Review questions covering major concepts are integrated throughout the chapter. Questions focusing on relevant diagnostic, treatment, and theoretical issues are incorporated within each mini-case. Answers to all questions are included in the back of the chapter, allowing students to test their mastery of the clinical and scholarly information regarding each major disorder. v Updated Research and Coverage Each chapter has been thoroughly updated and revised to include the latest information in the field. CONTENTS Chapter 1--Understanding Abnormality: A Look at History and Research Methods Chapter 2--Classification and Treatment Plans Chapter 3--Assessment Chapter 4--Theoretical Perspectives Chapter 5--Anxiety Disorders Chapter 6--Somatoform Disorders, Psychological Factors Affecting Medical Conditions, and Dissociative Disorders Chapter 7--Sexual Disorders Chapter 8--Mood Disorders Chapter 9--Schizophrenia and Related Disorders Chapter 10--Personality Disorders Chapter 11--Development-Related Disorders Chapter 12--Aging-Related and Cognitive Disorders Chapter 13--Substance-Related Disorders Chapter 14--Eating Disorders and Impulse-Control Disorders
67
Clinical Psychology
Abnormal Psychology – Readers
International Edition ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY WITH MINDMAP PLUS CD-ROM AND POWERWEB 9th Edition
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 5th Edition
Lauren Alloy, Temple University-Philadelphia, John Riskind, George Mason University and Margaret Manos 2005 / Hardcover / 640 pages ISBN: 9780077265861 ISBN: 9780071270151 [IE]
Richard P Halgin, University of Mass-Amherst 2009 / 512 pages ISBN: 9780073515267 Available: February 2008
Website: www.mhhe.com/alloy9 CONTENTS Chapter 1 Abnormal Behavior: Historical Perspectives Chapter 2 Diagnosis and Assessment Chapter 3 Research Methods in Abnormal Psychology Chapter 4 The Behavioral, Cognitive, and Sociocultural Perspectives Chapter 5 The Psychodynamic, Humanistic, and Interpersonal Perspectives Chapter 6 The Neuroscience Perspective Chapter 7 Anxiety Disorders Chapter 8 Dissociative and Somatoform Disorders Chapter 9 Psychological Stress and Physical Disorders Chapter 10 Mood Disorders Chapter 11 Personality Disorders Chapter 12 Substance-Use Disorders Chapter 13 Sexual Dysfunctions, Paraphilias, and Gender Identity Disorders Chapter 14 Schizophrenia and Delusional Disorder Chapter 15 Neuropsychological Disorders Chapter 16 Disorders of Childhood and Adolescence Chapter 17 Mental Retardation and Autism Chapter 18 Legal Issues in Abnormal Psychology
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515264.mhtml This Fifth Edition of TAKING SIDES: ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An online instructor’s resource guide with testing material is available. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM (ISBN 9780073343907) is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online. CONTENTS Unit 1 Psychological Conditions and Treatments Issue 1. Is Forced Treatment of Seriously Mentally Ill Individuals Justifiable? Issue 2. Should Individuals with Anorexia Nervosa Have the Right to Refuse Life-Sustaining Treatment? Issue 3. Is Psychological Debriefing a Harmful Intervention for Survivors of Trauma? Issue 4. Are Blocked and Recovered Memories Valid Phenomena? Issue 5. Is Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) a Real Disorder? Issue 6. Should MDMA (Ecstasy) Be Prohibited, Even for Therapeutic Use? Issue 7. Should Abstinence Be the Goal for Treating People with Alcohol Problems? Unit 2 The Trend Toward Biological Interventions Issue 8. Should Memory-Dampening Drugs Be Used to Alleviate the Symptoms of Trauma? Issue 9. Are Antipsychotic Medications the Treatment of Choice for People with Psychosis? Issue 10. Is Ritalin Overprescribed? Issue 11. Should Psychologists Prescribe Medication? Issue 12. Is Electroconvulsive Therapy Ethical? Unit 3 Social Issues Issue 13. Is It Ethical to Support the Wish for Healthy Limb Amputation in People with Body Integrity Identity Disorder (BIID)? Issue 14. Is Sexual Orientation Conversion Therapy Ethical? Issue 15. Does Exposure to Media Violence Promote Aggressive Behavior? Issue 16. Would Legalization of Virtual Child Pornography Reduce Sexual Exploitation of Children? Issue 17. Does Evolution Explain Why Men Rape? Issue 18. Should Mental Health Professionals Serve as Gatekeepers for Physician-Assisted Suicide? Issue 19. Must Mentally Ill Murderers Have a RationalUnderstanding of Why They Are Being Sentenced to Death?
68
Clinical Psychology
Counseling
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology
International Edition
*9780073380759*
COUNSELING AND PSYCHOTHERAPY TODAY
NEW
Carol Shaw Austad, Central Conn State University 2009 / Hardcover / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073112251 ISBN: 9780071101639 [IE] Available: September 2008
International Edition
DRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE 7th Edition
http://mhhe.com/austad1e Today’s counseling and psychotherapy-related careers require practitioners to grasp and respond to a continually changing context. This comprehensive and contemporary introduction to the field prepares students to engage productively with a variety of theoretical models, practice settings, and patient problems. The author draws on her experience as a practicing therapist and professor in presenting theory, practice, and research in a clear and compelling style. Starting with the big picture of psychotherapy within its sociocultural context and fundamental issues, Austad then reviews the major theoretical models. Students are encouraged to develop a mental model that helps them to compare and contrast key features of each theory and to understand the settings in which each best applies.
Richard Fields, Private Counseling Practice Tuscon AZ and Redmond Washington
2010 / Softcover / 434 pages ISBN: 9780073380759 ISBN: 9780071267625 [IE] Available: March 2009
www.mhhe.com.fields7e
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Chapter 1: The State of Psychotherapy and Counseling Chapter 2: Professionalism, Ethics, and Legal Issues in Chapter 3: Freud’s Classical Psychoanalysis Chapter 4: Psychodynamic Therapy After Freud Chapter 5: Adler’s Individual Psychology Chapter 6: Rogers’s Client-Centered Therapy Chapter 7: Existential Therapy Chapter 8: Gestalt Therapy Chapter 9: Behavior Therapy Chapter 10: Cognitive Therapy Chapter 11: Reality Therapy Chapter 12: Feminist Therapy Chapter 13: Biopsychosocial Therapy and Health Chapter 14: Psychopharmacology Chapter 15: Eclectic and Other Psychotherapies
v Updated and Reorganized: Chapters 1 and 2 have been updated and reorganized to reflect current information on etiology and trends in substance abuse and dependence. v Treatment and Relapse Prevention: Chapter 11 has been reorganized and updated to help students to understand both recovery and relapse prevention. This chapter lays a nice foundation for those who will explore careers in the counseling fields. v Updated Chapter Pedagogy: This new 6th edition has added many teaching and learning aids to each chapter including a chapter in review, chapter learning objectives and discussion questions. v New Information on Recovery: Chapter 9 (Change & Intervention for Substance Abuse Problems) has been revised and updated to focus on the issues of change and motivation and the ways to help substance abusers to focus on recovery. The chapter outlines ways to overcome denial and defensive rationalizations, and to avoid enabling behavior while maintaining healthy boundaries. CONTENTS Section I: Understanding Substance Abuse 1 Putting Drugs in Perspective 2 Why Do People Abuse Drugs? 3 Drug-Specific Information 4 Definitions of Substance Abuse, Dependence, and Addiction Section II: Family 5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems 6 Parenting 7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family System Section III: Prevention, Intervention, and Treatment 8 Prevention of Substance-Abuse Problems 9 Change, Motivation & Intervention for Substance-Abuse Problems 10 Disorders Co-Occurring with Substance Abuse 11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment and Relapse Prevention Appendix A: Trends in Annual Prevalence of Use of Various Drugs for Eight, Tenth, and Twelfth Graders Appendix B: Alcohol/Drug Screening Inventories Appendix C: Medication Examples Appendix D: At-Risk Factors For Substance Abuse
69
Clinical Psychology
Drugs / Psychopharmacology – Readers
International Edition DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND HUMAN BEHAVIOR 13th Edition Carl L Hart, Columbia University Charles J Ksir, University of Wyoming-Laramie Oakley S Ray (deceased)
NEW
2009 / Softcover / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073380797 ISBN: 9780071285599 [IE] Available: October 2008
*9780078050664* ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR 10/11 25th Edition
http://www.mhhe.com/hart13e Designed for the introduction to drugs and substance abuse course as taught in departments of health education, psychology, biology, sociology, and criminal justice, this full-color market-leading text provides the latest information on drugs and their effects on society and human behavior. For over thirty years, instructors and students have relied on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral, pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical perspectives
Hugh T Wilson, California State University-Sacramento 2011 / 224 pages ISBN: 9780078050664 Available: February 2010
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions [Details unavailable at press time]
CONTENTS Section One: Drug Use in Modern Society 1: Drug Use: An Overview 2: Drug Use as a Social Problem 3: Drug Products and Their Regulation Section Two: How Drugs Work 4: The Nervous System 5: The Actions of Drugs Section Three: Uppers and Downers 6: Stimulants 7: Depressants and Inhalants 8: Medication for Mental Disorders Section Four: Alcohol 9: Alcohol Section Five: Familiar Drugs 10: Tobacco 11: Caffeine 12: Dietary Supplements and Over-the-Counter Drugs Section Six: Restricted Drugs 13: Opioids 14: Hallucinogens 15: Marijuana 16: Performance-Enhancing Drugs Section Seven: Prevention and Treatment 17: Preventing Substance Abuse 18: Treating Substance Abuse and Dependence Appendix A Drug Names Appendix B Resources for Information and Assistance Glossary
NEW
*9780078127564* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN DRUGS AND SOCIETY 9th Edition Raymond Goldberg, State University of NY-Cortland 2010 / 512 pages ISBN: 9780078127564 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127564.mhtml Taking Sides volumes present current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript or challenge questions. Taking Sides readers feature an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites. An online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing material is available for each volume. Using Taking Sides in the Classroom is also an excellent instructor resource.
70
Clinical Psychology Unit 4: Other Trends in Drug Use 17. Salvia Divinorum, an Old Psychedelic Drug with New Appeal 18. FATAL Breaths 19. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of Prescription Drugs by College Students 20. A Nation without Drunk Driving 21. Euro Now Currency Favored by Traffickers 22. Hard Data on Hard Drugs, Grabbed from the Environment 23. A Dose of Reality: States Find Battle against Counterfeit Drug Market Difficult 24. Teens and Prescription Drugs: An Analysis of Recent Trends on the Emerging Drug Threat Unit 5: Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs 25. Crystal’s Sexual Persuasion 26. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systems and Populations 27. How Do Club Drugs Impact HIV Prevention? 28. The Problem with Drinking Unit 6: Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control Policy 29. Reorienting U.S. Drug Policy 30. America on Drugs 31. The Golden Age 32. Methamphetamine Precursor Regulation: Are We Controlling or Diverting the Drug Problem? 33. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate Use, and Public Policy: Expert Opinion or Vox Populi? 34. Durbin, Grassley Introduce Bipartisan Bill to Combat Meth 35. Small Town Drug Enforcement Unit 7: Prevention, Treatment, and Education 36. Parent Power 37. Exercise and Drug Detoxification 38. Mental Illness among Juvenile Offenders—Identification and Treatment 39. What Parents Need to Know about Pot 40. Exercise and Drug Detoxification 41. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That Work Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127632* ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR 09/10 24th Edition Hugh T Wilson, CA State University Sacramento 2010 / Softcover / 192 pages ISBN: 9780078127632 Available: February 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127637.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Drugs_Society_ and_Behavior_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Health textbooks by Hart et al. CONTENTS Unit 1: Living with Drugs 1. History of Alcohol and Drinking around the World 2. Under the Weather at J&J 3. The Myth of ADHD and the Scandal of Ritalin: Helping John Dewey Students Succeed in Medicine-Free College Preparatory and Therapeutic High School 4. Smoking, Drugs, Obesity Top Health Concerns for Kids 5. Did Prohibition Really Work? 6. Pass the Weed 7. Crystal Meth Boom Adds to South Africa’s Health Challenges 8. Living the High Life: The Role of Drug Taking in Young People’s Lives Unit 2: Understanding How Drugs Work–Use, Dependency, and Addiction 9. Reducing the Risk of Addiction to Prescribed Medications 10. Alcohol and Frontal Lobe Impairment: Fascinating Findings 11. Neuropeptide Promotes Drug-Seeking and Craving in Rats 12. Stress and Drug Abuse Unit 3: The Major Drugs of Use and Abuse 13. Helping Students Stay Clean and Sober 14. An Update on the Effects of Marijuana and Its Potential Medical Use: Forensic Focus 15. Prescription for Danger 16. A Pipeline for Cocaine
71
Clinical Psychology
Developmental Psychopathology International Edition CHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGY Jeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University--Ithaca 2008 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073405506 ISBN: 9780071263542 [IE] Available: October 2007
www.mhhe.com/haugaard1 All students who will one day work with children or their families can gain a basic foundation for understanding child psychopathology from this text. Students who seek careers in the mental health, physical health, or social work fields will find extensive information on childhood disorders, their prevention, and their treatment. All will gain an appreciation for the many facets of this growing field, and of the need to base interventions on research and on a humane attitude toward each child and family. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical Issues Chapter 3 Basic Psychological Theories Chapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral Genetics Chapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment Disorders Chapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder Chapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder Chapter 8 Bipolar Disorder Chapter 9 Depressive Disorders Chapter 10 Anxiety Disorders Chapter 11 Mental Retardation Chapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental Disorders Chapter 13 Childhood-onset Schizophrenia Chapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and Other Trauma (Posttraumatic Stress Disorder, Dissociative Disorders, Reactive Attachment Disorder) Chapter 15 Disorders Related to Physical Health and Functioning (Somatoform Disorders, Childhood Obesity, Elimination Disorders)
72
73
DEVELOPMENT EXPERIMENTAL ENGLISH PSYCHOLOGY
Cognitive Psychology .........................................................................................79 Perception ..........................................................................................................79 Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology .........................................................80 Research Methods .............................................................................................75 SPSS/SAS ..........................................................................................................77 Tests and Measurements ...................................................................................78
NEW TITLES EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
2011
Author
Research Design and Methods: A Process Approach, 8e
Bordens
9780073532028
75
Cohen
9780073129099
78
ISBN
Page
2010 Pscyhological Testing and Assessment, 7e
74
Experimental Psychology
Research Methods
International Edition RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY 8th Edition
NEW
John Shaughnessy, Hope College Eugene B Zechmeister and Jeanne S Zechmeister of Loyola UniversityChicago 2009 / Hardcover / 576 Pages ISBN: 9780073382692 ISBN: 9780071310970 [IE] Available: February 2008
*9780073532028* RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS A Process Approach, 8th Edition Kenneth S Bordens and Bruce Barrington Abbott of Indiana University 2011 / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073532028 Available: June 2010
http://www.mhhe.com/shaughnessy8e Research Methods in Psychology provides a comprehensive and readable introduction to methods for undergraduates. Employing a multi-method approach and exposing students to real examples of published research throughout the text, the authors provide students with the tools necessary to do good and ethical research in psychology and to understand the research they learn about in psychology courses and in the media. A wealth of pedagogical aids serve to break down the aversion and phobia that many students bring to a methods course. The 8th edition boasts a wealth of new examples with nearly 50 of the research examples from 2004-2007 and more than half of those from 2006 and 2007. So, as students read this methods text, they will also be learning about “cutting-edge” research in psychology.
[Details unavailable at press time]
International Edition METHODS IN BEHAVIORAL RESEARCH 10th Edition
CONTENTS
Paul C Cozby, California State University-Fullerton 2009 / Softcover / 448 pages ISBN: 9780073370224 ISBN: 9780071281027 [IE] Available: November 2008
Part I General Issues 1 Introduction 2 The Scientific Method 3 Ethical Issues in the Conduct of Psychological Research Part II Descriptive Methods 4 Observation 5 Survey Research 6 Unobtrusive Measures of Behavior Part III Experimental Methods 7 Independent Groups Designs 8 Repeated Measures Designs 9 Complex Designs Part IV Applied Research 10 Single-Case Designs, and Small-n Research 11 Quasi-Experimental Designs and Program Evaluation Part V Analyzing and Reporting Research 12 Data Analysis and Interpretation: Part I. Describing Data, Confidence Intervals, Correlation 13 Data Analysis and Interpretation: Part II. Tests of Statistical Significance and the Analysis Story 14 Communication in Psychology Appendix: Statistical Tables
http://www.mhhe.com/cozby10e Methods in Behavioral Research has achieved its market-leading position with its concise and strategic approach to methodological decision making. Combining helpful pedagogy and rich examples, Cozby’s tenth edition again incorporates learning objectives, illustrative graphics, and activities to increase student involvement. Highlights of the new edition include a broader introduction of different research techniques in Chapter 4, extensive revision of the “validity of measurements” section, and updated structural equations models. CONTENTS 1. Scientific Understanding of Behavior 2. Where to Start 3. Ethical Research 4. Studying Behavior 5. Measurement Concepts 6. Observational Methods 7. Asking People About Themselves: Survey Research 8. Experimental Design 9. Conducting Experiments 10. Complex Experimental Designs 11. Quasi-Experimental and Single-Participant Designs 12. Understanding Research Results: Description and Correlation 13. Understanding Research Results: Statistical Inference 14. Generalizing Results Appendix A: Writing Research Reports Appendix B: Statistical Tests Appendix C: Statistical Tables Appendix D: Constructing a Latin Square Glossary References Index
75
Experimental Psychology International Edition
International Edition
RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY: IDEAS, TECHNIQUES AND REPORTS
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: A PROCESS APPROACH 7th Edition
Chris Spatz, Hendrix College Edward P Kardas, Southern Arkansas University 2008 / 512 pages ISBN: 9780072530742 ISBN: 9780071116640 [IE] Available: February 2007
Kenneth Bordens and Bruce Barrington Abbott of Indiana University 2008 / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073129068 ISBN: 9780071266369 [IE] Available: July 2007
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/spatz
www.mhhe.com/bordens7
Emphasizing critical thinking and ethics, Spatz & Kardas’ Research Methods in Psychology presents a practical approach to investigating behavioral and mental processes. By understanding context, students are led to apply appropriate methods, collect data, and arrive at valid conclusions about subjects that relate to the world around them. Intended for a first undergraduate course, Research Methods in Psychology incorporates student-friendly features such as Chapter Reviews and Critical Thinking exercises, while providing all the background and tools necessary for students to conduct and report on their own research.
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: A PROCESS APPROACH, Seventh Edition, offers students an in-depth introduction to the process of research design and methods. It is distinguished by its application of the process approach, a proven strategy for guiding students at each step in designing, conducting, and evaluating psychological research. CONTENTS Preface Part I 1: Explaining Behavior 2: Developing and Evaluating Theories of Behavior 3: Getting and Developing Research Ideas 4: Choosing a Research Design 5: Making Systematic Observations 6: Choosing and Using Participants and Subjects 7: Understanding Ethical Issues in the Research Process Part II 8: Using Nonexperimental Research 9: Using Survey Research 10: Using Between-Subjects and Within-Subjects Experimental Designs 11: Using Specialized Research Designs 12: Using Single-Subject Designs 13: Describing Data 14: Using Inferential Statistics 15: Using Multivariate Design and Analysis 16: Reporting Your Research Results Appendix: Statistical Tables Glossary References Text Credits Index
CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1 Science Chapter 2 Research in Psychology Chapter 3 Ethics Chapter 4 Measurement Chapter 5 Data Exploration and Description Chapter 6 Statistical Tests Chapter 7 Design I: Between-Subjects Designs Chapter 8 Design II: Within-Subjects Designs and Pretests Chapter 9 Complex Designs Chapter 10 Observational, Qualitative, and Small-N Research Chapter 11 Planning Research Chapter 12 Conducting and Reporting Research APPENDIXES Appendix A Annotated APA manuscript Appendix B Ethical Standards of the APA Appendix C Statistical tables Appendix D Glossary of Terms References Index
76
Experimental Psychology
SPSS/SAS
International Edition PRINCIPLES OF RESEARCH IN BEHAVIORAL SCIENCE 2nd Edition
International Edition
Bernard E. Whitley, Jr., Ball State University 2002 / Hardcover / 544pages ISBN: 9780072932331 (with Internet Guide) - Out of Print ISBN: 9780071131353 [IE]
READY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TO SPSS® 13.0 AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS® 2nd Edition
Website: www.mhhe.com/whitley2
Thomas Pavkov and Kent Pierce of Purdue Univ-calumet-hammond 2007 / Softcover / 96 pages ISBN: 9780073126654 ISBN: 9780071252973 [IE without CD] Available: February 2006
CONTENTS 1. The Science of Psychology: Theory, Research, and Application 2. Research Strategies: An Overview 3. The Ethical Treatment of Research Participants 4. Formulating a Research Question 5. Developing a Measurement Strategy 6. The Internal Validity of Research 7. The Experimental Research Strategy 8. The Correlational (Passive) Research Strategy 9. The Single-Case Research Strategy 10. Research in Natural Settings 11. Survey Research 12. Data Collection 13. Interpreting Research Results 14. The External Validity of Research 15. Evaluation Research 16. Integrative Literature Reviewing 17. Writing Research Reports 18. The Professional and Social Responsibilities of Scientists
CONTENTS Preface Assignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSS Assignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and Descriptive Statistics Assignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic Form Assignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two Independent Samples Assignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two Related Sampled Assignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-Way ANOVA Assignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way ANOVA Assignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between Two Variables Assignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between Two Variables Assignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two Categorical Variables Appendix Entering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS
77
Experimental Psychology
Tests and Measurements
Test Construction Test Tryout Item Analysis Test Revision Part III The Assessment Of Intelligence Chapter 9 Intelligence And Its Measurement What Is Intelligence? Measuring Intelligence Intelligence: Some Issues Chapter 10 Tests Of Intelligence The Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scales The Wechsler Tests Other Measures Of Intelligence Chapter 11 Preschool And Educational Assessment Preschool Assessment Achievement Tests Aptitude Tests Diagnostic Tests Psychoeducational Test Batteries Other Tools Of Assessment In Educational Settings Part IV: The Assessment Of Personality Chapter 12 Personality Assessment: An Overview Personality And Personality Assessment Defined Personality Assessment: Some Basic Questions Developing Instruments To Assess Personality Personality Assessment And Culture Chapter 13 Personality Assessment Methods Objective Methods Projective Methods A Perspective Part V Testing And Assessment In Action Chapter 14 Clinical And Counseling Assessment An Overview Culturally Informed Psychological Assessment Special Applications Of Clinical Measures The Psychological Report Chapter 15 NeuropsychoLogical Assessment The Nervous System And Behavior The Neuropsychological Examination Neuropsychological Test Batteries Other Tools Of Neuropsychological Assessment Chapter 16 Assessment, Careers, And Business Career Choice And Career Transition Screening, Selection, Classification, And Placement Productivity, Motivation, Attitude, And Organizational Culture Other Applications Of Tools Of Assessment Self-Assessment References R-1 Credits C-1 Name Index N-1 Glossary/Index I-1
*9780073129099* NEW International Edition PSCYHOLOGICAL TESTING AND ASSESSMENT 7th Edition Ronald Jay Cohen, RJ Cohen Research Mark Swerdlik, Illinois State University 2010 / 720 pages ISBN: 9780073129099 ISBN: 9780071272230 [IE] Available: February 2009 Psychological Testing and Assessment: An Introduction to Tests and Measurement is the standard-setting text that through seven editions has overviewed measurement in psychology with unrivaled depth, breadth, and clarity. Logically organized and lucidly written, this book acquaints readers with important historical, legal, ethical, and cultural issues, and then proceeds to provide readers with the information necessary to understand psychometric concepts such as reliability, validity, and utility. Through writing that effectively anchors abstract concepts to real-life applications--and through the use of innovative teaching tools such as “Just Think” questions and the “Everyday Psychometrics” features in the text--readers will come away with a well-rounded, working knowledge of psychometrics and the assessment enterprise in a contemporary, real world context. CONTENTS Part I : An Overview Chapter 1: Psychological Testing And Assessment Chapter 2 Historical, Cultural, And Legal/Ethical Considerations Part II The Science Of Psychological Measurement Chapter 3 A Statistics Refresher Scales Of Measurement Describing Data The Normal Curve Standard Scores Chapter 4 Of Tests And Testing Some Assumptions About Psychological Testing And Assessment What’s A “Good Test”? Norms Correlation And Inference Inference From Measurement Chapter 5 Reliability The Concept Of RelIability Reliability Estimates Using And Interpreting A Coefficient Of Reliability Reliability And Individual Scores Chapter 6 Validity The Concept Of Validity Criterion-Related Validity Construct Validity Validity, Bias, And Fairness Chapter 7 Utility What Is Utility? Utility Analysis Methods For Settings Cut Scores Chapter 8 Test Development Test Conceptualization
78
Experimental Psychology
Cognitive Psychology
Perception
International Edition
International Edition
FUNDAMENTALS OF COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY 7th Edition
PERCEPTION 5th Edition Randolph Blake, Vanderbilt University — Nashville and Robert Sekuler, Brandeis University 2006 / Hardcover / 768 pages ISBN: 9780072887600 ISBN: 9780071112727 [IE] Available: July 2005
R. Reed Hunt, University of North Carolina - Greensboro and Henry C. Ellis, University of New Mexico-Albuquerque 2004 / Softcover / 480 pages ISBN: 9780072858952 ISBN: 9780071219167 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/blake5 CONTENTS CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Perceptual Processes Chapter 3: Attention Chapter 4: Short-term Working Memory Chapter 5: Long-term Memory Chapter 6: Implicit Memory Chapter 7: Forgetting and Distorted Memory Chapter 8: Metacognition Chapter 9: Concepts and Classification Chapter 10: Comprehension and Knowledge Chapter 11: Language Chapter 12: Problem-solving and Decision Making Chapter 13: Cognition and Emotion
1: Introduction to Perception 2: The Human Eye 3: The Eye and Seeing 4: Central Visual Pathways 5: Spatial Vision and Pattern Perception 6: Object Perception: Recognizing the Things We See 7: Color Perception 8: Seeing a Three-Dimensional World 9: Action and the Perception of Events 10: The Ear and Auditory System 11: Hearing and Listening 12: Speech and Music Perception 13: Touch 14: Chemical Senses I: Smell 15: Chemical Senses II: Taste
79
Experimental Psychology
Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology
New! 26. Jet Lag Unit 9. Emotions New! 27. Beyond a Joke New! 28. Relation Between Cardiac Vagal Tone and Performance in Male Military Personnel Exposed to High Stress New! 29. A Dynamic Model of Guilt New! 30. Is Automatic Emotion Regulation Associated with Agreeableness? New! 31. Buzzwords Unit 10. Learning and Memory New! 32. Neuronal Competition and Selection During Memory Formation New! 33. The Memory Code New! 34. Genetics, Dementia, and the Elderly New! 35. The Secret to Not Losing Your Marbles Unit 11. Disorders of Behavior and the Nervous System New! 36. Autistic Brains Out of Synch? New! 37. Changes in Anterior Cingulate and Amygdala After Cognitive Behavior Therapy of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder New! 38. Eyes Open, Brain Shut New! 39. Dissecting Dyslexia Unit 12. Evolutionary Perspective New! 40. Brain Evolution Studies Go Micro New! 41. Planet of the ... Dogs? New! 42. Ten Politically Incorrect Truths About Human Nature New! 43. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women Unit 13. Ethical Issues New! 44. Brain Scans Raise Privacy Concerns New! 45. The Promise and Predicament of Cosmetic Neurology New! 46. Wanting Babies Like Themselves
ANNUAL EDITIONS: BIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 08/09 6th Edition Boyce M Jubilan, Desales University Dawn Albertson, Minnesota State University-Mankato 2009 / Softcover / 256 pages ISBN: 9780073397788 Available: February 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397784.mhtml This Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: BIOPSYCHOLOGY 08/09 provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected from the best of the public press. Organizational features include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online. CONTENTS Unit 1. Methods in Biological Psychology New! 1. Thinking It Over New! 2. Really New Advances New! 3. Neuron Control New! 4. A Great Attraction Unit 2. The Cells and Regions of the Brain New! 5. The Dark Side of Glia New! 6. Mirror Neurons: How We Reflect on Behavior New! 7. Neural Correlates of a Mystical Experience in Carmelite Nuns New! 8. Damage to Specific Part of the Brain May Make Smokers ‘Forget’ to Smoke Unit 3. Neural Development and Plasticity New! 9. New Neurons Strive to Fit In 10. A Learning Machine New! 11. Uneven Regional Brain Development Contributes to Adolescent Risk-Taking Unit 4. Genetic Influences on Behavior New! 12. Nature, Nurture, Nuance New! 13. Gene Variant Increases Risk for Alcoholism Following Childhood Abuse Unit 5. Sensation and Perception New! 14. Psychophysics of Sweet and Fat Perception in Obesity New! 15. Cortical Activation to Indoor Versus Outdoor Scenes New! 16. Olfactory Neurons Expressing Transient Receptor Potential Channel M5 (TRPM5) Are Involved in Sensing Semiochemicals New! 17. Culture and the Physical Environment Unit 6. Motivation: Eating and Aggression New! 18. Metabolic and Hormonal Control of the Desire for Food and Sex New! 19. Modulation of Appetite by Gonadal Steroid Hormones New! 20. Influence of Aggressive Computer Games on the Brain Cortex Activity Level in Adolescents Unit 7. Reproductive or Sexual Behavior New! 21. Mammalian Animal Models of Psychosexual Differentiation New! 22. Ovulatory Shifts in Human Female Ornamentation New! 23. Interaction of Fraternal Birth Order and Handedness in the Development of Male Homosexuality Unit 8. Sleep and Biological Rhythms New! 24. Promoting Adjustment of the Sleep—Wake Cycle by Chronobiotics New! 25. Sleep and Immunity
80
81
DEVELOPMENT PSYCHOLOGY APPLIED ENGLISH
Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior ...............................................83 Sports Psychology ..............................................................................................83
NEW TITLES APPLIED PSYCHOLOGY
2010
Author
Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak Performance, 6e
Williams
82
ISBN 9780073376530
Page 83
Applied Psychology
Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior
Sports Psychology *9780073376530*
International Edition
NEW International Edition
HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING AND DESIGN 7th Edition Mark S. Sanders, California State University - Northridge and Ernest J. McCormick 1993 / Hardcover / 704 pages ISBN: 9780070549012 ISBN: 9780071128261 [IE]
APPLIED SPORT PSYCHOLOGY: PERSONAL GROWTH TO PEAK PERFORMANCE 6th Edition
CONTENTS
Jean M Williams, University of Arizona 2010 / Softcover / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073376530 ISBN: 9780071267984 [IE] Available: June 2009
Part I: Introduction 1 Human Factors and Systems / 2 Human Factors Research Methodologies / Part II: Information Input 3 Information Input and Processing / 4 Text, Graphics, Symbols, and Codes / 5 Visual Displays of Dynamic Information / 6 Auditory, Tactual, and Olfactory Displays / 7 Speech Communications / Part III: Human Output and Control 8 Physical Work and Manual Materials Handling / 9 Motor Skills / 10 Human Control of Systems / 11 Controls and Data Entry Devices / 12 Hand Tools and Devices / Part IV: Workplace Design 13 Applied Anthropometry, Work Space Design, and Seating / 14 Arrangement of Components within a Physical Space / 15 Interpersonal Aspects of Work Place Design / Part V: Environmental Conditions 16 Illumination / 17 Climate / 18 Noise / 19 Motion / Part VI: Human Factors Applications 20 Human Error, Accidents, and Safety / 21 Human Factors and the Automobile / 22 Human Factors in Systems Design / Appendixes / A: List of Abbreviations / B: Control Devices / C: NIOSH Recommended Action Limit Formula for Lifting Tasks
http://www.mhhe.com/williams6e Drawing upon the expertise of more than twenty leaders of their fields, this is a comprehensive and practical guide to psychological concepts and theories as well as to strategies and techniques designed to help future coaches and sport psychologists cultivate peak performance and personal growth through recent advances in sport psychology. The text’s four-part organization focuses on motivation and leadership, social interactions, mental training, program implementation, and issues that go beyond performance enhancement. Contributing authors are experts in their topic, and each chapter has been written specifically for this collection. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Updated content throughout reflects the latest research, examples, and cutting-edge practice in applied sport psychology. v New exercises and case studies help students to think critically and to apply the content to diverse real-world situations. v New chapter on gender and cultural diversity reflects the growing importance of cultural competence to sport psychology researchers and practitioners. v Selected revisions improve clarity and succinctness, including the combination of the two leadership and the two concentration chapters. CONTENTS 1. Sport Psychology: Past, Present, Future Part 1: Learning, Motivation, and Social Interaction 2. Motor Skill Learning for Effective Coaching and Performance 3. A Positive Approach to Coaching Effectiveness and Performance Enhancement 4. Motivational Processes and the Facilitation of Quality Engagement in Sport 5. The Self-Fulfilling Prophecy Theory: When Coaches’ Expectations Become Reality 6. Leadership Effectiveness and Decision Making in Coaches 7. The Sport Team as an Effective Group 8. Communicating Effectively Part 2: Mental Training for Performance Enhancement 9. Psychological Characteristics of Peak Performance 10. Increasing Awareness for Sport Performance 11. Goal Setting for Peak Performance 12. Arousal-Performance Relationships
83
Applied Psychology 13. Relaxation and Energizing Techniques for Regulation of Arousal 14. Seeing Is Believing: Understanding and Using Imagery in Sport 15. Cognitive Techniques for Building Confidence and Enhancing Performance 16. Concentration and Strategies for Controlling It Part 3: Implementing Training Programs 17. Integrating and Implementing a Psychological Skills Training Program 18. Conducting Psychologically Oriented Coach-Training Programs: A Social-Cognitive Approach 19. Gender and Cultural Considerations Part 4: Enhancing Health and Well-Being 20. When to Refer Athletes for Counseling or Psychotherapy 21. Drug Abuse in Sport: Causes and Cures 22. Burnout in Sport: Understanding the Process—From Early Warning Signs to Individualized Intervention 23. Injury Risk and Rehabilitation: Psychological Considerations 24. Career Transition among Athletes: Is There Life after Sports? 25. Exercise Psychology
International Edition SPORT PSYCHOLOGY 6th Edition Richard H. Cox, University of Missouri-Columbia 2007 / Softcover / 512 pages ISBN: 9780072972955 ISBN: 9780071106429 [IE] Available: February 2006
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cox6e CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction 1 Introduction to Sport Psychology Part 2: Motivation of the Athlete 2 Motivation and Self-confidence in Sport 3 Goal Perpective in Sport 4 Attribution in Sport 5 Developing Intrinsic Motivation 6 Goal Setting in Sport 7 Youth Sports Part 3: Arousal, Attention and Personality of the Athlete 8 Neurophysiology of Arousal 9 Attention and Concentration in Sport 10 Personality of the Athlete Part 4: Situational Factors Related to Anxiety and Mood 11 Mood State and Athletic Performance 12 Anxiety, Arousal and Stress Relationships 13 Alternatives to Inverted-U Theory Part 5: Cognitive and Behavioral Interventions 14 Coping Strategies in Sport 15 Relaxation Strategies in Sport 16 Arousal Energizing Strategies in Sport 17 Imagery and Sport Performance 18 Role of Hypnosis in Sport 19 Psychological Skills Training Part 6: Social Psychology of Sport and Exercise 20 Agression and Violence in Sport 21 Audience and Crowd Effects in Sport 22 Team Cohesion in Sport 23 Leadership in Sport Part 7: Psychobiology of Sport and Exercise 24 Exercise Psychology 25 Overtraining and Burnout 26 Psychology of Athletic Injuries 27 Drug Abuse in Sport and Exercise
84
85
DEVELOPMENT PSYCHOLOGY ENGLISHHISTORY & SYSTEMS
History and Systems...........................................................................................86
Psychology History & Systems
History and Systems
International Edition HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY 4th Edition David Hothersall, Ohio State University 2004 / Softcover / 624 pages ISBN: 9780072849653 ISBN: 9780071214742 [IE]
International Edition A CONCEPTUAL HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY
Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/00728496 57/
John D Greenwood 2009 / Hardcover / 720 pages ISBN: 9780072858624 ISBN: 9780071263535 [IE] Available: January 2008
CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1 Psychology and the Ancients Chapter 2 Philosophical and Scientific Antecedents of Psychology Chapter 3 Early Studies of the Central Nervous System Chapter 4 Wilhelm Wundt and the Founding of Psychology Chapter 5 Edward Titchener and Hugo Munsterberg Chapter 6 German Psychologists of the Nineteenth and Early Twentieth Centuries Chapter 7 Gestalt Psychology in Germany and the United States Chapter 8 The History of Clinical Psychology and the Development of Psychoanalysis Chapter 9 Darwin, Galton, Cattell, James, and Hall Chapter 10 Functionalism at the University of Chicago and Columbia University Chapter 11 Historical Uses and Abuses of Intelligence Testing Chapter 12 The Research of Ivan Pavlov and the Behaviorism of John B. Watson Epilogue
http://www.mhhe.com/greenwood1e A Conceptual History of Psychology is a broad historical survey that traces conceptual continuities and discontinuities in the history of psychological thought. The author connects the history of psychological theory with the development of the history of science, from the proto-scientific psychology of the 17th and 18th centuries to the institutionalized scientific psychology of the late 19th century to the present day. The lucid writing style and clear organization reflect the author’s fifteen years’ experience teaching the course. CONTENTS Chapter 1: History, Science and Psychology Chapter 2: Ancient Greek Science and Psychology Chapter 3: Rome and the Medieval Period The Roman Age Chapter 4: The Scientific Revolution Chapter 5: The Newtonian Psychologists Chapter 6: Physiology and Psychology Positivism Chapter 7: Theories of Evolution Chapter 8: Psychology in Germany Chapter 9: Psychology in America: The Early Years Chapter 10: Functionalism, Behaviorism and Mental Testing Chapter 11: Neobehaviorism, Radical Behaviorism, and the Problems of Behaviorism Chapter 12: The Cognitive Revolution Chapter 13: Abnormal and Clinical Psychology Neuroses, Alienists and Psychiatry Chapter 14: Social and Developmental Psychology
86
87
DEVELOPMENT SEXUALITY HUMAN ENGLISH
Human Sexuality ................................................................................................89 Human Sexuality – Readers ...............................................................................90
NEW TITLES HUMAN SEXUALITY
2010
Author
ISBN
Annual Editions: Gender 10/11
Hutchison
9780078050527
90
Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e
Hutchison
9780073516349
91
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 11e
Taverner
9780073545639
92
88
Page
Human Sexuality
Human Sexuality
International Edition DIMENSIONS OF HUMAN SEXUALITY 6th Edition
INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS 5th Edition
Curtis O. Byer, Mt. San Antonio College, Louis W. Shainberg, Mt. San Antonio College, Grace Galliano, Kennesaw State University and Sharon P. Shriver, Pennsylvania State University 2002 / Hardcover / 640 pages ISBN: 9780072412789 (Out of Print) ISBN: 9780071212762 [IE]
Rowland Miller, Sam Houston State University Daniel Perlman Sharon Stephens Brehm 2009 / Softcover / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073370187 Available: December 2008
Website: www.mhhe.com/byer6
www.mhhe.com/millerint5e
CONTENTS
Miller’s 5th edition of Intimate Relationships retains all of the qualities that made the trusted text a best seller, with a new organization that makes the material accessible to students. The text has engaging, accessible prose, a comprehensive reach across disciplines, vigorous standards of scholarship, and a personal appeal in its subject matter. The new edition is more concise with two newreorganized chapters, but still packed with new developments and current research woven into every chapter. The authors illustrate the relevance of relationship science to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and analysis. This lively, comprehensive, user-friendly text provides students with the tools they need to succeed in this course.
Part 1: Sexual Dimensions 1: Thinking About Human Sexuality 2: Communication and Sexuality 3: Attraction, Love, Partnerships Part 2: Physical Sexuality 4: Female Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health 5: Male Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health 6: Sexually Transmitted Infections 7: HIV and AIDS Part 3: Sexual Response And Pleasuring 8: Sexual Response, Dyfunction and Therapy 9: Sexual Pleasuring 10: Sexuality in Disability and Illness Part 4: Developmental Sexuality 11: Biological Sexual Development 12: Gender Identity and Gender Roles 13: Childhood and Adolescent Sexuality 14: Adult Sexuality Part 5: Reproductive Sexuality 15: Fertility Management 16: Conception, Pregnancy, and Children Part 6: Social Issues In Sexuality 17: 7 Variations in Sexual Behavior 18: Commercial and Coercive Sex
CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction to the Study of Intimate Relationships Chapter 1: The Building Blocks of Relationships Chapter 2: Research Methods Part 2: Getting Together and Basic Processes in Intimate Relationships Chapter 3: Attraction Chapter 4: Social Cognition Chapter 5: Communication Chapter 6: Interdependency Part 3 Friendship and Intimacy Chapter 7: Friendships Chapter 8: Love Chapter 9: Sexuality Part 4 Relationship Issues Chapter 10: Stresses and Strains Chapter 11: Conflict Chapter 12: Power and Violence Part 5 Losing and Enhancing Relationships Chapter 13: The Dissolution and Loss of Relationships Chapter 14: Maintaining and Repairing Relationships
89
Human Sexuality
Human Sexuality – Readers
UNIT 4: Gender, Work, and Health Part A. Gender and Work 20. The Emperor’s New Woes 21. The Media Depiction of Women Who Opt Out 22. Great Expectations 23. Labor Markets, Breadwinning, and Beliefs: How Economic Context Shapes Men’s Gender Ideology Part B. Gender and Health 24. A Woman’s Curse? 25. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Females and Males: Risk and Resilience 26. When Sex Hurts 27. Health Behaviors, Prostate Cancer, and Masculinities: A Life Course Perspective UNIT 5: Genders and Sexualities 28. (Rethinking) Gender 29. Progress and Politics in the Intersex Rights Movement: Feminist Theory in Action 30. What Do Women Want? 31. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the More They Stay the Same 32. Peer Marriage 33. State of Our Unions: Marriage Promotion and the Contested Power of Heterosexuality 34. Five Years on, Gay Marriage Debate Fades in Massachusetts 35. Everyone’s Queer 36. The Berdache Tradition 37. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents UNIT 6: Gender and Social Issues 38. Flower Grandma’s Secret 39. Sexual Assault on Campus: What Colleges and Universities Are Doing about It 40. Male Rape Myths: The Role of Gender, Violence, and Sexism 41. Effects of Sexual Assaults on Men: Physical, Mental, and Sexual Consequences 42. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution 43. Fall Girls 44. Women, Citizens, Muslims 45. Beyond Hillary: Strength in Numbers Ann Friedman Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078050527* ANNUAL EDITIONS: GENDER 10/11 Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages ISBN: 9780078050527 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078050529.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Theoretical and Research Perspectives 1. The Social Construction of Gender 2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social Relations 3. Gender Is Powerful: The Long Reach of Feminism 4. The World, the Flesh and the Devil 5. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women 6. Beauty, Gender and Stereotypes: Evidence from Laboratory Experiments 7. I’m Not a Very Manly Man: Qualitative Insights into Young Men’s Masculine Subjectivity UNIT 2: Gender and Development 8. Gender and Group Process: A Developmental Perspective 9. Gender Bender 10. The Secret Lives of Single Women 11. Goodbye to Girlhood, 12. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior 13. How Many Fathers Are Best for a Child? 14. What Autistic Girls Are Made of UNIT 3: Gender and Education 15. Learning and Gender 16. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development 17. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating Gender-Friendly Middle School Classrooms 18. Female Faculty in Male-Dominated Fields: Law, Medicine, and Engineering 19. Scaling the Ivory Towers
90
Human Sexuality 17. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior 18. Torn between Two Mothers 19. Staying up Late with Sue 20. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the More They Stay the Same UNIT 4: Intimacies and Relationships 21. Free as a Bird and Loving It 22. Happily Never Married 23. This Thing Called Love 24. Pillow Talk 25. Behind the Cloak of Polygamy 26. Love at the Margins: Extreme Relationships Demand Extreme Commitment 27. My Cheatin’ Heart UNIT 5: Gender and Sexual Diversity Part A. Perspectives on Gender 28. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women 29. Learning and Gender 30. Goodbye to Girlhood 31. (Rethinking) Gender Part B. Perspectives on Sexual Orientation 32. Finding the Switch 33. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents 34. Broadcast News: The Insider Is Out UNIT 6: Sexual Health and Well-Being Part A. Problems and Interventions 35. Sex, Health & Happiness 36. Fighting the Cancer a Mammo Can’t Catch 37. When Sex Hurts Part B. Sexually Transmitted Infections and HIV 38. Popping the Other Question 39. Sex, Drugs, Prisons, and HIV 40. HIV Plan B 41. HIV Apathy UNIT 7: Sexualities and Social Issues 42. Flower Grandma’s Secret, 43. You Can’t Do That on Television 44. Sex, Politics, and Morality at the FDA: Reflections on the Plan B Decision, Frank Davidoff 45. Guess Who’s Watching Porn 46. Breeder Reaction 47. The Sex Offender Next Door 48. Sexual Assault on Campus: What Colleges and Universities Are Doing about It 49. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780073516349* ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN SEXUALITY 31st Edition Bobby Hutchison, Modesto Jr College
2010 / Softcover / 224 pages ISBN: 9780073516349 Available: February 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516341.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Human_ Sexualities_31e.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Human Sexualities, 31/e with the corresponding chapters in two of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Sexuality textbooks by Hyde/ DeLamater and Kelly. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Social and Cultural Foundations Unit Overview 1. Vox Populi: Sex, Lies, and Blood Sport 2. The Baby Deficit 3. Three `Rules’ That Don’t Apply 4. Everyone’s Queer 5. A Mind Dismembered: In Search of the Magical Penis Thieves 6. Afterbirths in the Afterlife: Cultural Meaning of Placental Disposal in a Hmong American Community 7. Gender Is Powerful: The Long Reach of Feminism 8. How AIDS Changed America UNIT 2: Biological Foundations Part A. Reproductive Capacities 9. Starting the Good Life in the Womb 10. Success at Last 11. A Man’s Shelf Life Part B. Pleasure and Desire 12. The Orgasmic Mind 13. Women’s Sexual Desire: A Feminist Critique UNIT 3: Sexualities and Development 14. How to Talk about Sex 15. The Birds and the Bees and Curious Kids 16. What to Tell the Kids about Sex
91
Human Sexuality Unit 5 Gender and Sexual Orientation Issue 18. Is Gender Identity Disorder an Appropriate Psychiatric Diagnosis? Issue 19. Should Corporations Ensure Equal Rights for Their Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Employees? Issue 20. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?
NEW
*9780073545639* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN HUMAN SEXUALITY 11th Edition
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER 4th Edition
William J Taverner, Fairleigh Dickinson University 2010 / Softcover / 384 pages ISBN: 9780073545639 Available: September 2009
Jacquelyn W White 2009 / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073515298 Available: March 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073545635.mhtml
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtml
TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY, 11/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls. com.
This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to controversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent the arguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators, reflect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their liveliness and substance and because of their value in a debate framework. Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally and politically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKING SIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts, presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and public discourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills by analyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments. The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what is gender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover that what might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is so much more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only) accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have been provided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teaching suggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teaching hints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion around the themes raised by the clashing essays.
NEW TO THIS EDITION v
Correlation Guide:
v www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Human_ Sexuality_11e.pdf v This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: Human Sexuality, 11/e with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Sexuality textbooks by Yarber et al.
CONTENTS Unit 1 Definitions And Cultural Boundaries: A Moving Target Issue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny? Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate? Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and Sciences Have a Biological Basis? Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question Of Difference Issue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different? Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and Men Innately Determined? Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responses to Stress Gender-Based? Unit 3 Violence In The Daily Lives Of Women And Men Issue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender? Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levels of Violence Against Intimate Partners? Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape? Unit 4 From Ozzie And Harriet To My Two Dads: Gender In Childhood Issue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry? Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parents for Children? Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being? Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society? Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender In The World Of Work Issue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) Improve Women’s Lives? Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in the Workplace? Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?
CONTENTS Unit 1 The Nature of Sex Issue 1. Has sex become too casual? Issue 2. Can Sex Be Addictive? Issue 3. Does Sexual Medicine Benefit Society? Issue 4. Is Oral Sex Really Sex? Issue 5. Is BDSM a healthy form of sexual expression? Unit 2 Sex Education Issue 6. Is there something wrong with the content of comprehensive sex education curricula? Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach about Abstinence? Issue 8. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make Some College Campuses Healthier than Others? Unit 3 Sex and Society Issue 9. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination before They Enroll in School? Issue 10. Should libraries and other places that provide public wifi restrict sexual content? Issue 11. Should the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”? Issue 12. Should Prostitution Be Legal? Issue 13. Should Society Support Cohabitation before Marriage? Unit 4 Reproductive Choices Issue 14. Should Pharmacists have the Right to Refuse Contraceptive Prescriptions? Issue 15. Is Abortion Immoral? Issue 16. Should There be Restrictions on the Number of Embryos Implanted during In-Vitro Fertilization? Issue 17. Should Parents Be Allowed to Select the Sex of Their Baby?
92
Human Sexuality Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to Societal Obstacles? Unit 6 Gender And Sexuality: Double Standards? Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong? Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message to Teens? Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional Gender Constraints?
93
Psychology & Sociology
94
95
DEVELOPMENT SOCIOLOGY ENGLISH
Comparative Societies......................................................................................156 Criminology.......................................................................................................145 Criminology – Readers .....................................................................................146 Drugs & Society ................................................................................................143 Drugs & Society – Readers ..............................................................................144 Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers ....................................................123 Introductory Sociology ........................................................................................99 Introductory Sociology – Readers ....................................................................104 Marriage & the Family ...................................................................................... 111 Marriage & the Family – Readers .....................................................................113 Medical Sociology – Readers ...........................................................................122 Political Sociology.............................................................................................129 Race and Ethnicity............................................................................................126 Race and Ethnicity – Readers ..........................................................................128 Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality .................................................................118 Research Methods ...........................................................................................141 Sex Roles .........................................................................................................154 Social Inequality / Social Stratification ..............................................................131 Social Problems................................................................................................108 Social Problems – Readers ..............................................................................108 Social Psychology ............................................................................................139 Social Psychology – Readers ...........................................................................141 Sociological Theory ..........................................................................................133 Sociological Theory – Readers.........................................................................135 Sociology of Death ...........................................................................................124 Sociology of Death – Readers ..........................................................................124 Sociology of Education – Readers ...................................................................147 Sociology of Family ..........................................................................................114 Sociology of Family – Readers .........................................................................116 Sociology of Gender .........................................................................................137 Sociology of Health – Readers .........................................................................149 Sociology of Law – Readers .............................................................................146 Sociology of Sexuality – Readers .....................................................................151 Sociology of Sport ............................................................................................147 Sociology of Women.........................................................................................136 Special Topics...................................................................................................157 Special Topics – Readers .................................................................................158 SPSS / SAS ......................................................................................................142
SOCIOLOGY
Statistics ...........................................................................................................142 Technology & Society .......................................................................................155 Urban Sociology ...............................................................................................125
96
NEW TITLES SOCIOLOGY
2011
Author
Annual Editions: Aging 10/11, 23e
ISBN
Page
Cox
9780078050596
123
Annual Editions: Computers in Society 10/11, 16e
De Palma
9780073528588
155
Readings in Social Theory, 6e
Farganis
9780078111556
135
Annual Editions: Social Problems 10/11, 37e
Finsterbusch
9780078050565
108
Social Problems and the Quality of Life, 12e
Lauer
9780073528281
108
Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts In Sociology, The, 5e
McIntyre
9780073404400
99
Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology, The, 5e
McIntyre
9780073404431
99
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, 16e
Noll
9780078049972
147
Classical Sociological Theory, 6e
Ritzer
9780078026652
133
Sociological Theory, 8e
Ritzer
9780078111679
133
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 5e
White
9780078049941
154
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 10/11, 25e
Wilson
9780078050664
144
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 5e
White
9780078049941
138, 151, 154
2010 Criminology, 7e
Adler
9780073401584
145
Annual Editions: Violence And Terrorism 10/11, 12e
Badey
9780078127618
109
Public and Private Families: A Reader, 6e
Cherlin
9780073404363
111, 115
Public and Private Families: An Introduction, 6e
Cherlin
9780073404356
114
Discovery of Society, 8e, The
Collins
9780073404196
99, 104, 135
Annual Editions: Aging 09/10, 22e
Cox
9780078127731
123
Annual Editions: Health 10/11 with Free Taking Sides: Clashing Views in
Daniel
9780077386115
149
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Health And Society, 9e
Daniel
9780078139444
150
Annual Editions: Computers In Society 09/10, 15e
De Palma
9780073528540
155
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e
Dickinson
9780078127670
124
Who Rules America? Power, Politics, and Social Change, 6e
Domhoff
9780078111563
129
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Science, Technology And Society, 9e
Easton
9780078139406
156
Annual Editions: Education 10/11, 37e
Evers
9780078135859
147
Mapping the Social Landscape: Readings in Sociology, 6e
Ferguson
9780073528212
100
Drugs in Perspective, 7e
Fields
9780073380759
143
Health and Society, 9/E, 31e
97
NEW TITLES SOCIOLOGY (continued)
2010
Author
Annual Editions: Sociology 09/10, 38e
ISBN
Page
Finsterbusch
9780078127724
105
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, Expanded, 15e
Finsterbusch
9780078127502
106, 109
Annual Editions: The Family 10/11, 36e
Gilbert
9780078135880
113, 116
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Drugs And Society, 9e
Goldberg
9780078127564
144
Annual Editions: Developing World 10/11, 20e
Griffiths
9780078127816
130
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Crime And Criminology, 9e
Hickey
9780078139437
146
Annual Editions: Gender 10/11
Hutchison
9780078050527
121, 138, 151
Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e
Hutchison
9780073516349
152
TakIng Sides: Clashing Views On Legal Issues, 14e
Katsh
9780078127595
146
Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 17e
Kromkowski
9780078127625
128
Annual Editions: Urban Society, 14e
Levine
9780078127717
125
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 13e
Levine
9780073545660
122
Social Psychology, 10e
Myers
9780073370668
139
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3e
Nier
9780078139413
141
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Educational Issues, Expanded, 15e
Noll
9780073545653
148
Sociology, 12e
Schaefer
9780073404332
101
Global Sociology: Introducing Five Contemporary Societies, 5e
Schneider
9780073404189
102, 105, 156
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 8e
Schroeder
9780073515403
114, 117
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Human Sexuality, 11e
Taverner
9780073545639
153
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10, 24e
Wilson
9780078127632
144
Chan
9780071270267
157
2009 Ethics and Social Responsibility: Asian and Western Perspectives (Asian Pub)
98
Sociology
Introductory Sociology
NEW
*9780073404196* NEW
*9780073404400*
THE DISCOVERY OF SOCIETY 8th Edition
THE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: CORE CONCEPTS IN SOCIOLOGY 5th Edition
Randall Collins, University of Pennsylvania Michael Makowsky, Musart Company
Lisa J McIntyre, Washington State University-Pullman 2011 / 320 pages ISBN: 9780073404400 Available: June 2010
2010 / 288 pages ISBN: 9780073404196 Available: March 2009
[Details unavailable at press time]
This classic text explores the lives and ideas of the social thinkers who have shaped and continue to forge traditions in sociology. Focusing on the great names in the field, it weaves biographical and conceptual details into a tapestry of the history of social thought of the 19th and 20th centuries. Written in a narrative style that is accessible and exciting, this text serves as an excellent supplement for courses in social and sociological theory, the history of social thought, the history of sociology, and introduction to sociology.
NEW
*9780073404431*
NEW TO THIS EDITION
THE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: READINGS IN SOCIOLOGY 5th Edition
v Added section on Globalism, the Information Revolution, and Postmodernism examines various sociological perspectives on contemporary life.
Lisa J McIntyre, Washington State University-Pullman 2011 / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073404431 Available: June 2010
CONTENTS Introduction: Society and Illusion Chapter 1. The Prophets of Paris: Saint-Simon and Comte Chapter 2. Sociology in the Underground: Karl Marx Chapter 3. The Last Gentleman: Alexis de Tocqueville Chapter 4. Nietzsche’s Madness Chapter 5. Do-Gooders, Evolutionists and Racists Chapter 6: Dreyfus’ Empire: Emile Durkheim Chapter 7: Max Weber: The Disenchantment of the World Chapter 8: Sigmund Freud: Conquistador of the Irrational Chapter 9: The Discovery of the Invisible World: Simmel, Cooley and Mead Chapter 10. The Discovery of the Ordinary World: Thomas, Park, and the Chicago School Chapter 11. The Emergence of African-American Sociology: DuBois, Frazier, Drake and Cayton Chapter 12. The Construction of the Social System: Pareto and Parsons Chapter 13. Hitler’s Shadow: Mannheim and Mills Chapter 14. Erving Goffman and the Theatre of Social Encounters Chapter 15. Cultural Capital, Revolution, the World-system, and Globalization: the Theories of Pierre Bourdieu, Theda Skocpol, and Immanuel Wallerstein Bibliographical Suggestions Index
[Details unavailable at press time]
99
Sociology
NEW
*9780073528212* MAPPING THE SOCIAL LANDSCAPE Readings in Sociology, 6th Edition Susan J Ferguson, Grinnell College 2010 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073528212 Available: November 2009
www.mhhe.com/ferguson6e Drawing from a wide selection of classic and contemporary works, the 58 selections in this best-selling reader represent a plurality of voices and views within sociology. In addition to classic works by authors such as Karl Marx, Max Weber, C. Wright Mills, David Rosenhan, Kingsley Davis and Wilbert Moore, this anthology presents a wide range of contemporary scholarship, some of which provides new treatments of traditional concepts. By integrating issues of diversity throughout the book, Ferguson helps students see the inter-relationships of race, social class, and gender, and the ways in which they have shaped the experiences of all people in society. NEW TO THIS EDITION v A dozen new selections of cutting-edge contemporary sociological research illustrate analyses of timely social issues and the intersections between race, social class, and gender. v New selections examine teen suicide, dating culture on college campuses, drug networks in small towns, masculinity and homophobia in high schools, drinking and gender identity among college women, and the U.S. media’s treatment of Muslim Americans. v Up-to-date and accessible treatment of culture, gender, and social change demonstrates the diversity within the discipline of sociology. CONTENTS * = New to this edition Preface I. The Sociological Perspective 1. C. Wright Mills, The Promise--classic piece on the sociological imagination *2. Donna Gaines, Teenage Wasteland: Suburbia’s Dead-End Kids-applying the sociological imagination to teen suicide 3. Mary Romero, An Intersection of Biography and History: My Intellectual Journey--applying the sociological imagination to domestic service Social Research 4. Michael Schwalbe, Finding Out How the Social World Works--a summary of what it means to be sociologically mindful 5. Craig Haney, W. Curtis Banks, and Philip G. Zimbardo, Interpersonal Dynamics in a Simulated Prison--classic piece on the research design of Zimbardo’s famous experiment 6. Mitchell Duneier, Sidewalk--an ethnographic study of street vendors in New York City II. Culture 7. Barry Glassner, The Culture of Fear: Why Americans Fear the Wrong Things--one perspective of American culture *8. Paula England and Ruben J. Thomas, The Decline of the Date and the Rise of the College Hook Up--an investigation into the dating culture on one college campus *9. Sabeen Sandhu, Instant Karma: The Commercialization of Asian Indian Culture--how culture and identity are transformed when commercialized 10. Haunani-Kay Trask, Lovely Hula Hands: Corporate Tourism and the Prostitution of Hawaiian Culture--an examination of cultural commodification and exploitation III. Socialization 11. Judith Lorber, “Night to His Day”: The Social Construction of Gender--the socialization of gender identity
*12. Betsy Lucal, What It Means to Be Gendered Me: Life on the Boundaries of a Dichotomous Gender System--one woman’s narrative of gender identity and performance 13. Robert Granfield, Making It By Faking It: Working-Class Students in an Elite Academic Environment--working class identity and law school socialization 14. Gwynne Dyer, Anybody’s Son Will Do--resocialization into the total institution of the military IV. Groups and Social Structure 15. Patricia A. Adler and Peter Adler, Peer Power: Clique Dynamics among School Children--a study of the structure and interactional dynamics among groups of school children 16. Martin Sanchez Jankowski, Gang Business--a functional analysis of a primary group 17. Christine L. Williams, Shopping as Symbolic Interaction: Race, Class, and Gender in the Toy Store--a study of secondary group relationships and social interaction 18. Mark Colvin, Descent Into Madness: The New Mexico State Prison Riot--an example of social structure breaking down V. Deviance, Crime, and Social Control 19. David L. Rosenhan, On Being Sane in Insane Places--classic piece on labeling and social deviance 20. Penelope E. McLorg and Diane E. Taub, Anorexia Nervosa and Bulimia: The Development of Deviant Identities--the social construction of deviant identities *21. Paul Draus and Robert G. Carlson, Down on Main Street: Drugs and the Small-Town Vortex--an ethnographic study of the social networks of illicit drug use in rural small towns 22. A. Ayres Boswell and Joan Z. Spade, Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why Are Some Fraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?--the social organization of crime VI. Social Inequality Social Class 23. Kingsley Davis, Wilbert E. Moore, and Melvin Tumin, Some Principles of Stratification--classic piece on the functions of social stratification 24. G. William Domhoff, Who Rules America?: The Corporate Community and the Upper Class--the lifestyles and social institutions of the upper class 25. Thomas M. Shapiro, The Hidden Cost of Being African American: How Wealth Perpetuates Inequality--an examination of social class and racial differences in wealth 26. Barbara Ehrenreich, Nickel-and-Dimed on (Not) Getting by in America--an exploration of the lives of the working poor Gender 27. Barbara Risman, Gender as Structure--a review of four theories that explain sex and gender *28. C.J. Pascoe, ‘Dude, You’re a Fag’: Adolescent Masculinity and the Fag Discourse--an examination of masculinity and homophobia in high schools *29. Amy Young et al., Drinking Like a Guy: Frequent Binge Drinking Among Undergraduate Women--research on drinking and gender identity among college women 30. Meika Loe, Working at Bazooms: The Intersection of Power, Gender, and Sexuality--an investigation of gender and sexuality in the workplace Race and Ethnicity 31. Eduardo Bonilla-Silva, “New Racism,” Color-Blind Racism, and the Future of Whiteness in America--the persistence of whiteness and racial inequality in America 32. Charlie LeDuff, At a Slaughterhouse, Some Things Never Die--an examination of the racial dynamics at one workplace site 33. Katherin M. Flower Kim, Out of Sorts: Adoption and (Un)Desirable Children--how race and racism influence adoption decisions *34. Elijah Anderson, The Cosmopolitan Canopy--an enthnographic account of how urban spaces can transform race relations VII. Social Institutions Power and Politics 35. C. Wright Mills, The Power Elite--classic piece on the power elite
100
Sociology 36. Dan Clawson, Alan Neustadtl,and Mark Weller, Dollars and Votes: How Business Campaign Contributions Subvert Democracy--an application of Mills’ power elite 37. Charles Derber, One World Under Business--the financial dynamics and politics of globalization Mass Media 38. Gregory Mantsios, Media Magic: Making Class Invisible--how the mass media distorts social class *39. Brigitte L. Nacos and Oscar Torres-Reyna, Muslim Americans in the News before and after 9/11--the U.S. media’s treatment of Muslim Americans 40. Karen Sternheimer, It’s Not the Media: The Truth About Pop Culture’s Influence On Children--an examination of media violence and its effects on children The Economy and Work 41. Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, The Manifesto of the Communist Party--classic piece on the relationship between the capitalists and the workers 42. Robin Leidner, Over the Counter: McDonald’s--an ethnographic study of the routinization of work 43. Arlie Russell Hochschild, The Time Bind: When Work Becomes Home and Home Becomes Work--how individuals combine their work and home lives Religion 44. Max Weber, The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism-classic piece on the influence of religion on the economy *45. Steven P. Dandaneau, Religion and Society: Of Gods and Demons--a sociological overview of the institution of religion 46. Russell Shorto, Faith at Work--how some Christians are bringing faith into the workplace Health and Medicine *47. Lillian B. Rubin, Sand Castles and Snake Pits--an examination of how deinstitutionalization increased the numbers of mentally ill among the homeless 48. Eric Klinenberg, Dying Alone: The Social Production of Urban Isolation--the health consequences of the 1995 Chicago heat wave 49. David A. Karp, Illness and Identity--an interview study of people with depression Education 50. Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes, Civilize Them With A Stick-education as an institution of social control 51. Jonathan Kozol, Still Separate, Still Unequal: America’s Educational Apartheid--racial segregation in American schools 52. Ann Arnett Ferguson, Bad Boys: Public Schools in the Making of Black Masculinity--racial and gender stereotyping in American schools The Family 53. Andrew J. Cherlin, The Deinstitutionalization of American Marriage--an examination of the weakening of social norms in the institution of marriage 54. Ann Crittendon, The Mommy Tax--the income discrimination faced by working mothers 55. Annette Lareau, Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race, and Family Life--a study of social class differences in parenting and child rearing in African American and white families VIII. Social Change *56. Charles L. Harper and Kevin T. Leicht, American Social Trends-an overview of social change in America 57. D. Stanley Eitzen, The Atrophy of Social Life--how social isolation is affecting society 58. Allan G. Johnson, What Can We Do? Becoming a Part of the Solution--social change strategies to deal with privilege and oppression
NEW
*9780073404332* SOCIOLOGY 12th Edition Richard T Schaefer, DePaul University 2010 / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073404332 ISBN: 9780070172371 [IE] Available: September 2009
http://www.mhhe.com/schaefer12e Sociology provides an up-to-date and comprehensive introduction to sociology for today’s student. Known for its balanced coverage of the 3 perspectives, this text continues to encourage students to think about their world with a sociological imagination. Through its strong coverage of globalization, race and ethnicity, careers in sociology, and current topics like mass media and social policy, Sociology provides students with knowledge they can use on campus, at work, in their neighborhoods, and in the global community. The new 12th edition features updated sections in various chapters reflecting recent sociological changes like the impact of the current economic downturn on social class and the global culture war. New Research Today boxes provide students with relevant examples of sociological research. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Significantly revised chapters on culture (3); stratification (9), racial and ethnic inequality (11) and health and the environment (19) including coverage of topics such as the global culture war; college students’ environmental values; the impact of the current economic downturn on social class; the growing gap between rich and poor; and much more v New “Research Today” boxes focus on sociologically relevant, student-centered examples of sociological research such as online socializing as a new agent of socialization; precarious work; cell phone users; and jury decision making about the drinking rape victim. v Seven new chapter-opening excerpts convey the relevance of sociological inquiry through lively passages on sociological topics, including material from Patricia and Peter Adler; Sudhir Venkatesh; Paul Collier and Kelsey Timmerman. v New “Thinking About Movies” feature in each chapter discusses two movies that are related to the themes of the chapter - Each feature includes a brief description of each movie followed by application questions. CONTENTS Part 1: The Sociological Perspective 1: Understanding Sociology 2: Sociological Research Part 2: Organizing Social Life 3: Culture 4: Socialization and the Life Course 5: Social Interaction and Social Structure 6: Groups and Organizations 7: The Mass Media 8: Deviance and Social Control Part 3: Social Inequality 9: Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States 10: Global Inequality 11: Racial and Ethnic Inequality 12: Stratification by Gender 13: Stratification by Age Part 4: Social Institutions 14: The Family and Intimate Relationships 15: Religion 16: Education
101
Sociology 17: Government and Politics 18: The Economy and Work 19: Health, Medicine, and the Environment Part 5: Changing Society 20. Population, Communities, and Urbanization 21. Collective Behavior and Social Movements 22. Social Change in the Global Community
International Edition SOCIOLOGY: THE CORE 9th Edition Michael Hughes, VA Poly Institute & State University Carolyn J Kroehler 2009 / Softcover / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073404257 ISBN: 9780071285520 [IE] Available: November 2008
NEW
http://www.mhhe.com/hughes9
*9780073404189* GLOBAL SOCIOLOGY: INTRODUCING FIVE CONTEMPORARY SOCIETIES 5th Edition
Highly respected for its scholarship and straightforward approach, Sociology: The Core covers core sociological concepts with a brief and accessible presentation at an affordable price. In the ninth edition, Sociology once again comes alive as a vital and exciting field to relate sociological principles to real-world circumstances. New “What Can Sociology Do For You?” sections introduce the careers and provide educational recommendations for students that decide to pursue a degree in Sociology. CONTENTS
Linda Schneider and Arnold Silverman of Nassau Community College 2010 / 352 pages ISBN: 9780073404189 Available: January 2009 An effective supplement to any standard sociology text, this broad and comprehensive sociological description of five diverse contemporary societies with wide geographic distribution - Japan, Mexico, Egypt, Germany, and the Bushmen of Namibia - is organized around basic sociological topics: culture, social structure, group life, socialization, deviance, social institutions, social stratification, and social change. Fictional vignettes of individuals in each country help students experience first-person viewpoints on life in five very different societies. By comparing other societies with their own, students read about the range of social variation, learn what makes their own society distinctive, and gain a unique and fascinating vantage point on what sociology offers in a world of rapid social change. The fifth edition has been fully updated to reflect recent economic and political changes. New and updated data is included in each chapter. Current concerns such as crime, drug trafficking, ethnic diversity, gender, income inequality, political Islam and social change in traditional societies are addressed throughout the book. The impact of and response to global economic changes is a continuing theme in every chapter.
Chapter 1: Developing a Sociological Consciousness Chapter 2: Culture and Social Structure Chapter 3: Socialization Chapter 4: Social Groups and Formal Organizations Chapter 5: Deviance and Crime Chapter 6: Social Stratification Chapter 7: Inequalities of Race and Ethnicity Chapter 8: Gender Inequality Chapter 9: Political and Economic Power Chapter 10: The Family Chapter 11: Religion, Education, and Medicine Chapter 12: Population and Environment Chapter 13: Social Change
NEW TO THIS EDITION v New fictional vignettes expand the scope of this successful feature, giving students a personal glimpse into the daily lives of people in other cultures. v More generous use of subheads allows for easier navigation of chapters. v Updated treatment of the response to global economic change allows students to compare varied approaches to the challenges of globalization. v Increased emphasis on German immigration policy and ethnic diversity tolerance provides a fascinating counterpoint to domestic protocol. CONTENTS Chapter 1. Japan: The Importance of Belonging Chapter 2. Mexico: Conflict and Cooperation Chapter 3. The San of Namibia: Ancient Culture in a New Nation Part I: San Culture: A Design for Living Part II: Social Change and the Future: The Postcolonial Era Chapter 4. Egypt: Faith, Gender, and Class Chapter 5. Germany: Diversity in a Modern Nation-State
102
Sociology SOCIOLOGY MATTERS 4th Edition
International Edition
Richard T Schaefer, Depaul University 2009 / Softcover / 384 pages ISBN: 9780073404318 Available: November 2008
SOCIOLOGY: A BRIEF INTRODUCTION 8th Edition Richard T Schaefer, Depaul University 2009 / Softcover / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073404264 ISBN: 9780071271738 [IE] Available: September 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/schaefersm4e
http://www.mhhe.com/schaefer8e This revised edition of Richard T. Schaefer’s Sociology: A Brief Introduction provides students with a comprehensive, up-to-date presentation of sociology. Students learn to think critically about society and their own lives from a wide range of classical and contemporary perspectives. Combining balanced coverage of theory with current research findings, examples that students can relate to, and abundant learning aids and exercises, the new edition continues to encourage the development of sociological imagination. Greater coverage of globalization through a new chapter and boxes focusing on “Social Change in the Global Community” help remove ethnocentric blinders and teaches students to think globally about issues and policies. CONTENTS Chapter-Opening Excerpts Social Policy Sections Maps, Summing Up Tables, and Photo Essays Preface 1 Understanding Sociology 2 Sociological Research 3 Culture 4 Socialization and the Life Course 5 Social Interaction, Groups, and Social Structure 6 The Mass Media 7 Deviance and Social Control 8 Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States 9 Global Inequality 10 Racial and Ethnic Inequality 11 Stratification by Gender 12 The Family and Intimate Relationships 13 Education and Religion 14 Government and the Economy 15 Health, Medicine, and the Environment 16 Social Change in the Global Community Glossary References Acknowledgments Photo Credits Name Index Index
Richard T. Schaefer’s Sociology Matters is a concise introduction to the discipline of sociology. Its straightforward style, streamlined design, and highly focused coverage make it the perfect affordable, ultra brief, introductory text for instructors who use a variety of materials in their course. The new fourth edition includes new chapter opening vignettes and up to date coverage of current topics such as the Virginia Tech shooting and the use of virtual networks such as Facebook. CONTENTS Chapter 1: The Sociological View Chapter 2: Culture and Socialization Chapter 3: Social Interaction, Groups, and Social Structure Chapter 4: Deviance and Social Control Chapter 5: Stratification in the United States and Global Inequality Chapter 6: Inequality by Race and Ethnicity Chapter 7: Inequality by Gender Chapter 8: Social Institutions: Family and Religion Chapter 9: Social Institutions: Education, Government, and the Economy Chapter 10: Population, Community, Health, and the Environment Chapter 11: Social Movements, Social Change, and Technology
REVISITING SOCIOLOGY (In Chinese) By Keung-Sing Ho 2005 / 200 pages ISBN: 9780071249966
[An Asian Publication] 䗭ᰃ⚎ᅌᴀ⾥ࡃᅌᅌ⫳᪄ᆿⱘᬭ⾥ˈ䘽ড়ׂ䅔⼒᳗ᅌܹ䭔nj ⱘᅌ⫳䮅䅔ˈгৃկᴀ⾥催ᑈ㋮ᅌ⫳⚎গ㗗DŽѺ᳝ࡽᮐᇡ⼒᳗ᅌ ᛳ㟜䍷ᛇњ㾷⧒ҷ⼒᳗ⱘ᳝ᖗҎDŽ FEATURES v ᴀড়ϗԡᅌ㗙Пˈҹ݊ᬭᅌⷨおᇜ䭋᪄ᆿ᳝䮰㆛ゴ㗠 ៤DŽ v ᴀܻᆍ⏅ܹ⏎ߎˈ↣ゴࣙNjὖᗉ㟛⧚䂪njঞNjᴀೳⷨおnjܽ ܗ㋴DŽNjὖᗉ㟛⧚䂪njࣙᣀ⬠ᅮᴀὖᗉঞҟ㌍ǃ䀩䂪。⧚䂪DŽ Njᴀೳⷨおnjࠛࣙᣀ佭␃ᴀഄⱘ⧚䂪䖃䂪ˈҹঞ储ⱘⷨおⱐ⧒DŽ v ᴀࣙڇ㍅⼒᳗ᅌܹ䭔ⱘ䂆丠ˈ՟བԩ䃖⼒᳗ᅌǃ⼒᳗ᅌⷨ おㄝ˗ԚѺ᳝䓗ᮄ〢ⱘ䂆丠՟བᮙ䘞ǃ䭦ᱛˈᦤկ䅔㗙㘇Ⳃϔᮄⱘ ᛳ㾎DŽ v ᴀߛড়ᰖҷⱐሩˈ↣㆛ゴഛҟ㟛䁆䂆丠Ⳍ䮰ⱘ㎆ഔˈ䅧䅔㗙 ᳝䘆ϔℹ㋶ⱘ″᳗ˈϺᔋ݊䮅䅔㟜䍷DŽ
103
Sociology
Introductory Sociology – Readers
International Edition SOCIOLOGY: DIVERSITY, CONFLICT, AND CHANGE Kenneth J. Neubeck, Emeritus, University of Connecticut-Storrs Davita Silfen Glasberg, University of Connecticut-Storrs 2005 / 576 pages / Softcover ISBN: 9780072504767 ISBN: 9780071114608 [IE]
NEW
*9780073404196*
www.mhhe.com/neubeck CONTENTS 1. The Sociological Imagination Part One: Core Sociological Concepts 2. Social Structure: Macro-Level 3. Social Structure: Mid-and Micro-Levels 4. Culture 5. Socialization 6. Systems of Inequality 7. Intersection of Race, Class, and Gender 8. Deviance, Crime, Resistance, and Social Control 9. Social Change and Social Movements Part Two: Institutional Spheres 10. The State and Capital 11. Work and Production 12. Education 13. Health 14. Families 15. Religion Part Three: Thinking About The Future 16. Emerging Issues
THE DISCOVERY OF SOCIETY 8th Edition Randall Collins, University of Pennsylvania Michael Makowsky, Musart Company 2010 / 288 pages ISBN: 9780073404196 Available: March 2009 This classic text explores the lives and ideas of the social thinkers who have shaped and continue to forge traditions in sociology. Focusing on the great names in the field, it weaves biographical and conceptual details into a tapestry of the history of social thought of the 19th and 20th centuries. Written in a narrative style that is accessible and exciting, this text serves as an excellent supplement for courses in social and sociological theory, the history of social thought, the history of sociology, and introduction to sociology. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Added section on Globalism, the Information Revolution, and Postmodernism examines various sociological perspectives on contemporary life. CONTENTS Introduction: Society and Illusion Chapter 1. The Prophets of Paris: Saint-Simon and Comte Chapter 2. Sociology in the Underground: Karl Marx Chapter 3. The Last Gentleman: Alexis de Tocqueville Chapter 4. Nietzsche’s Madness Chapter 5. Do-Gooders, Evolutionists and Racists Chapter 6: Dreyfus’ Empire: Emile Durkheim Chapter 7: Max Weber: The Disenchantment of the World Chapter 8: Sigmund Freud: Conquistador of the Irrational Chapter 9: The Discovery of the Invisible World: Simmel, Cooley and Mead Chapter 10. The Discovery of the Ordinary World: Thomas, Park, and the Chicago School Chapter 11. The Emergence of African-American Sociology: DuBois, Frazier, Drake and Cayton Chapter 12. The Construction of the Social System: Pareto and Parsons Chapter 13. Hitler’s Shadow: Mannheim and Mills Chapter 14. Erving Goffman and the Theatre of Social Encounters Chapter 15. Cultural Capital, Revolution, the World-system, and Globalization: the Theories of Pierre Bourdieu, Theda Skocpol, and Immanuel Wallerstein Bibliographical Suggestions Index
104
Sociology
NEW
NEW
*9780073404189*
*9780078127724*
GLOBAL SOCIOLOGY: INTRODUCING FIVE CONTEMPORARY SOCIETIES 5th Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIOLOGY 09/10 38th Edition Kurt Finsterbusch, University of MarylandCollege Park
Linda Schneider and Arnold Silverman of Nassau Community College 2010 / 352 pages ISBN: 9780073404189 Available: January 2009
2010 / Softcover / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127724 Available: March 2009
An effective supplement to any standard sociology text, this broad and comprehensive sociological description of five diverse contemporary societies with wide geographic distribution - Japan, Mexico, Egypt, Germany, and the Bushmen of Namibia - is organized around basic sociological topics: culture, social structure, group life, socialization, deviance, social institutions, social stratification, and social change. Fictional vignettes of individuals in each country help students experience first-person viewpoints on life in five very different societies. By comparing other societies with their own, students read about the range of social variation, learn what makes their own society distinctive, and gain a unique and fascinating vantage point on what sociology offers in a world of rapid social change. The fifth edition has been fully updated to reflect recent economic and political changes. New and updated data is included in each chapter. Current concerns such as crime, drug trafficking, ethnic diversity, gender, income inequality, political Islam and social change in traditional societies are addressed throughout the book. The impact of and response to global economic changes is a continuing theme in every chapter.
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127726.mhtml
NEW TO THIS EDITION
NEW TO THIS EDITION
v New fictional vignettes expand the scope of this successful feature, giving students a personal glimpse into the daily lives of people in other cultures.
v To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309073).
v More generous use of subheads allows for easier navigation of chapters. v Updated treatment of the response to global economic change allows students to compare varied approaches to the challenges of globalization. v Increased emphasis on German immigration policy and ethnic diversity tolerance provides a fascinating counterpoint to domestic protocol. CONTENTS Chapter 1. Japan: The Importance of Belonging Chapter 2. Mexico: Conflict and Cooperation Chapter 3. The San of Namibia: Ancient Culture in a New Nation Part I: San Culture: A Design for Living Part II: Social Change and the Future: The Postcolonial Era Chapter 4. Egypt: Faith, Gender, and Class Chapter 5. Germany: Diversity in a Modern Nation-State
Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_Sociology_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Sociology 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer, Witt, and Hughes/Kroehler. CONTENTS Unit 1: Culture Part A. American Culture and Cultural Change 1. Understanding American Worldview 2. The Denial of Virtue 3. The Atrophy of Social Life 4. The Myth of the “Culture of Poverty” Part B. Value Issues 5. Diversity within Unity: A New Approach to Immigrants and Minorities 6. The Dubious Value of Value-Neutrality Unit 2: Socialization and Social Control Part A. Influences on Personality and Behavior 7. The Social Construction of Gender 8. Worth Every Penny: Can Cash Incentives Create Model Citizens? 9. The New Sex Scorecard Part B. Crime, Law Enforcement, and Social Control 10. Fighting Crime: An Economist’s View 11. The Prison Boom and the Decline of American Citizenship 12. The Aggregate Burden of Crime Unit 3: Groups and Roles in Transition Part A. Marriage and the Family 13. Can Marriage Be Saved? 14. The Opt-Out Myth
105
Sociology 15. Peer Marriage, Pepper Schwartz, The Communitarian Reader: Beyond the Essential Part B. Gender and Gender Roles 16. Feminists and Fundamentalists 17. All Happy Families: The Looming Battle over Gay Parenting Part C. City and Community 18. An Age of Transformation 19. Why Aren’t U.S. Cities Burning? Unit 4: Stratification and Social Inequalities Part A. Income Inequalities 20. Goodbye, Horatio Alger: Moving Up Economically Is Now Impossible for Many, If Not Most, Americans 21. Connecting the Dots Part B. Welfare and Welfare Reform 22. A Work in Progress Part C. Racial and Ethnic Issues and Inequalities 23. Nearer to Overcoming 24. Whites Swim in Racial Preference 25. Why We Hate Part D. Sex Inequalities and Issues 26. Great Expectations 27. Scaling the Ivory Tower 28. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution Unit 5: Social Institutions: Issues, Crises, and Changes Part A. The Political Sphere: Power, Politics, and Administration 29. Who Rules America?: Power, Politics, and Social Change, 5th ed. 30. Inside the Hidden World of Earmarks 31. Foresight for Government Part B. The Economic Sphere: Changing Consumption, Workplaces, Workforce 32. Reversal of Fortune 33. The Future of Outsourcing: How It’s Transforming Whole Industries and Changing the Way We Work Part C. The Social Sphere: Education, Health, and Religion 34. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?: The High School Experience: Proposals for Improvement 35. Medical Guesswork 36. Pandemic Pandemonium 37. In Search of the Spiritual Unit 6: Social Change and the Future Part A. Population Issues 38. Enough Already 39. Putting a Stop to Slave Labor: A Moral Solution to Illegal Immigration Part B. Environment and Safety 40. Plan B 3.0: Mobilizing to Save Civilization 41. Climate Change, Coming Home: Global Warming’s Effects on Populations 42. Draining Our Future: The Growing Shortage of Freshwater Part C. Technology for Better or for Worse 43. Who’s Afraid of Human Enhancement?: A Reason Debate on the Promise, Perils, and Ethics of Human Biotechnology 44. Biotech on the Farm: Realizing the Promise Part D. Terrorism and War 45. Defeating Terrorism: Is It Possible? Is it Probable? 46. Nightmare in Manhattan 47. Winter Soldiers Sound Off Part E. Macro Changes for the World and the United States 48. Update on the State of the Future 49. A User’s Guide to the Century 50. Understanding Our Moment in History: Living Between Two Ages Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780078127502* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES, EXPANDED 15th Edition Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland— College Park 2010 / Softcover / 432 pages ISBN: 9780078127502 Available: March 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127505.mhtml TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls. com. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ TS_Social_Issues_15eX.pdf v This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: Social Issues, 15/e Expanded with the corresponding chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Witt, Hughes/Kroehler, and Schaefer. CONTENTS Unit 1 Culture and Values Issue 1. Is America in Moral Decline? Issue 2. Does the News Media Have a Liberal Bias? Issue 3. Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way of Life? Unit 2 Sex Roles, Gender, and the Family Issue 4. Does Divorce Have Long-Term Damaging Effects on Children? Issue 5. Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children? Issue 6. Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized? Unit 3 Stratification and Inequality Issue 7. Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem? Issue 8. Has Feminism Benefited American Society? Issue 9. Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness? Issue 10. Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to Girls and Women? Unit 4 Political Economy and Institutions Issue 11. Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist Economy? Issue 12. Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor? Issue 13. Is Competition the Reform That Will Fix Education? Issue 14. Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and Enhance Humans? Unit 5 Crime and Social Control Issue 15. Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime? Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Legalized? Issue 17. Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant the Curtailment of Civil Liberties? Unit 6 The Future: Population/Environment/Society Issue 18. Is Humankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?
106
Sociology Issue 19. Is Globalization Good for Humankind? Issue 20. Is America Dominated by Big Business? Issue 21. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to Societal Obstacles? Issue 22. Is the World a Victim of American Cultural Imperialism?
CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES: SOCIOLOGY 4th Edition Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland-College Park 2009 / Softcover / 272 pages ISBN: 9780073379807 Available: August 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379808.mhtml This reader provides over 40 selections of enduring intellectual value-classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--that have shaped the study of sociology and our contemporary understanding of it. CONTENTS The Sociological Perspective Selection 1: C. WRIGHT MILLS, from The Sociological Imagination (OxfordUniversity Press, 1959) 1 Selection 2: HERBERT BLUMER, from “Society as Symbolic Interaction,” in Human Behavior and Social Processes, Arnold Ross, ed. (Houghton Mifflin, 1962) 4 Culture Selection 3: J. LAVELLE INGRAM, from “Understanding American Worldview,” in Life in the USA (2007) 9 Selection 4: HORACE MINER, from “Body Ritual Among the Nacirema,” American Anthropologist (June 1956) 12 Selection 5: ELIJAH ANDERSON, from “The Code of the Streets,” The Atlantic Monthly (1994) 15 Selection 6: DEBORAH TANNEN, from You Just Don’t Understand (William Morrow, 1990) 20 Socialization, Socializing, Human Biotech Potential, and the Social Construction of Society Selection 7: MARGARET L. ANDERSEN and DANA HYSOCK, from Thinking about Women, 8/e (Allyn & Bacon, 2009) 25 Selection 8: PHYLLIS MOEN and PATRICIA ROEHLING, from The Career Mystique: Cracks in the American Dream (Rowman &Littlefield, 2005) 30 Selection 9: D. STANLEY EITZEN, from “The Atrophy of Social Life,”Society (September/October 2004) 35 Selection 10: ALYSSA FORD, from “Humanity: The Remix,” Utne Reader (May/June 2005) 40 Selection 11: PETER L. BERGER, from Invitation to Sociology: A Humanistic Perspective (Doubleday, 1963) 45 Selection 12: ERVING GOFFMAN, from The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life (Doubleday, 1959) 49 Deviance, Crime, and Social Control Selection 13: JOHN J. DONOHUE, from “Fighting Crime,” Milkin Institute Review (First Quarter 2005) 55 Selection 14: DAVID A. ANDERSON, from “The Aggregate Burden of Crime,” Journal of Law and Economics (October 1999) 61 Social Organization: Groups, Associations, Social Movements, Communities, and Rational Organizations Selection 15: ROBERT WUTHNOW, from “How Small Groups Are Transforming Our Lives,” Christianity Today (February 1994) 67 Selection 16: FRANCIS FUKUYAMA, from “Social Capital and Civil Society” (International Monetary Fund, 2000) 71 Selection 17: AMITAI ETZIONI, ET AL., from “Diversity within Unity: NewApproach to Immigrants and Minorities,” The Communitarian Reader: Beyond the Essentials (Rowan & Littlefield, 2004)76 Selection 18: CHARLES TILLY, from “Social Movements,” in Regimes and Repertoires (University of Chicago Press, 2006) 81 Selection 19: FRED SIEGEL, from “The Death and Life of America’s
Cities,” The Public Interest (Summer 2002) 86 Selection 20: CHARLES PERROW, from Organizing America: Wealth, Power, and the Origins of Corporate Capitalism (Princeton University Press, 2002) 91 Social Inequality Selection 21: DOUGLAS S. MASSEY, from “How Stratification Works,” from Categorically Unequal: The American Stratification System (Russell Sage Foundation, 2007) 97 Selection 22: KARL MARX and FRIEDRICH ENGELS, from The Communist Manifesto (1848) 103 Selection 23: JEFF MADRICK, from “Goodbye, HoratioAlger,” The Nation (February 5, 2007) 108 Selection 24: DAVID K. SHIPLER, from “Connecting the Dots,” in John Edwards, et al., Ending Poverty in America (The New Press, 2007) 112 Views of the Top and the Bottom Selection 25: ROBERT PERRUCCI and EARL WYSONG, from “Care and Feeding of the Privileged Class,” The New Class Society (Rowman & Littlefield, 2008) 118 Selection 26: JONATHAN KOZOL, from “Poverty’s Children: Growing Up in the South Bronx,” The Progressive (October 1995) 123 Racial and Sexual Inequality Selection 27: NORMAN KELLEY, from “Virtual Equality, Virtual Segregation,” Society (July/August 2006) 130 Selection 28: SILVIA ANN HEWLETT and CAROLYN BUCK LUCE, from “Off-Ramps and On-Ramps: Keeping Talented Women on the Road to Success,” Harvard Business Review (March 2005) 137 Selection 29: ALICE LEUCHTAG, from “Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution,” The Humanist (January/February 2003) 144 The Political System Selection 30: G. WILLIAM DOMHOFF, from Who Rules America? (McGraw-Hill, 2006) 150 Selection 31: LILLIAN B. RUBIN, from “Sand Castles and Snake Pits: Homelessness, Public Policy, and the Law of Unintended Consequences,” Dissent Magazine (Fall 2007) 155 Selection 32: DAVID OSBORNE and TED GAEBLER, from “Reinventing Government,” in The New Democrat (March 1992) 160 The Economy Selection 33: BETSY MORRIS and PATRICIA NEERING, from “The New Rules,” Fortune (July 24, 2006) 167 Selection 34: THOMAS L. FRIEDMAN, from “It’s a Flat World, After all,” New York Times Magazine (April 3, 2005) 172 The Family Selection 35: FRANK FURSTENBERG, from “Can Marriage Be Saved?,” Dissent Magazine (Summer 2005) 179 Selection 36: PEPPER SCHWARTZ, “Peer Marriage,” The Communitarian Reader (Rowman & Littlefield, 2004) 183 Selection 37: HUMAN RIGHTS CAMPAIGN, from “Answers to Questions About Marriage Equality” (Family Net Project, 2004) 189 Other Institutions: Education, Health Care, and Religion Selection 38: CHESTER E. FINN, JR., from “Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?,” Education Next (Winter 2006) 195 Selection 39: ROBERT LANGRETH, from “Fixing Hospitals,” Forbes Magazine (June 20, 2005) 200 Selection 40: JERRY ADLER, from “In Search of the Spiritual”, Newsweek (August 29–September 5, 2005) 205 Population, Environment, and Society Selection 41: LESTER R. BROWN, from Plan B 3.0 (Earth Policy Institute, 2008) 212 Selection 42: SARAH DEWEERDT, from “Climate Change, Coming Home: Global Warming’s Effects on Populations,” World Watch Magazine (May/June 2007) 217 Global Social Change Selection 43: SAMUEL P. HUNTINGTON, from “The Clash ofCivilizations?” Foreign Affairs (Summer 1993) 223 Selection 44: MARVIN J. CETRON, from “DefeatingTerrorism: Is ItPossible? Is It Probable?” The Futurist (May/June 2007) 230 Selection 45: STEVEN WEBER, ET AL., from “Globalization Went Bad,” Foreign Policy (January/February 2008) 236
107
Sociology
Social Problems
Unit II Countering the Terrorist Threat Chapter 6 Terrorism and the Media Chapter 7 The Challenges of Terrorism to a Free Society Chapter 8 Strategies and Approaches for Combating Terrorism Chapter 9 Leveraging the Role of the Private Sector Chapter 10 Winning the War on Terrorism
NEW
*9780073528281*
Social Problems – Readers
SOCIAL PROBLEMS AND THE QUALITY OF LIFE 12th Edition Robert H Lauer and Jeanette C Lauer of Alliant International University 2011 / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073528281 Available: June 2010
NEW
[Details unavailable at press time]
*9780078050565* ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMS 10/11 37th Edition
TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS 3rd Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland-College Park 2011 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078050565 Available: March 2010
Russell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer of US Military Academy Natasha E Bajema 2009 / 696 pages ISBN: 9780073379791 Available: February 2008
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 794.mhtml In this new edition of TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM: UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS, Brigadier General (Retired) Russell Howard, Major Reid Sawyer and Natasha Bajema have collected original and previously published seminal articles and essays by political scientists, government officials, and members of the nation’s armed forces. The editors and several of the authors write from practical field experience in the nation’s war on terrorism. Others have had significant responsibility for planning government policy and responses. The contributors include a majority of the significant names in the field including John Arquilla, Richard Betts, Martha Crenshaw, Rohan Gunaratna, Bruce Hoffman and Paul Pillar. Part One of the book analyzes the philosophical, political, and religious roots of terrorist activities around the world and discusses the national, regional, and global effects of historical and recent acts of terrorism. In addition to material on the threats from suicide bombers, as well as chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear weapons, there are also important contributions analyzing new and growing threats such as genomic terrorism. Part Two deals with past, present, and future national and international responses to--and defenses against-terrorism. Essays and articles in this section analyze and debate the practical, political, ethical, and moral questions raised by military and non-military responses (and pre-emptive actions) outside of the context of declared war. This section has expanded on the previous edition to include three timely chapters on terrorism and the media, the role of the private sector, and winning the war on terrorism.
Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
CONTENTS Unit I Defining the Threat Chapter 1 Defining Terrorism: Means, Ends, and Motives Chapter 2 Understanding the Facilitators of Modern Terrorism Chapter 3 The New Terrorism Chapter 4 Religion and the Intersection with Terrorism Chapter 5 Modern Methods and Modes of Attack
108
Sociology
NEW
*9780078127618* ANNUAL EDITIONS: VIOLENCE AND TERRORISM 10/11 12th Edition Thomas J Badey, Randolph-Macon College 2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127618 Available: September 2009
28. The Madrassa Scapegoat Unit 8: Women and Terrorism 29. Female Suicide Bombers: A Global Trend 30. The Bomb Under the Abaya 31. Picked Last: Women and Terrorism Unit 9: Government Response 32. Knowing the Enemy 33. Deterring Terrorists: What Israel Has Learned 34. Intelligence and the War on Terror: How Dirty Are We Willing to Get Our Hands? 35. Air Security: Why You’re Not as Safe as You Think Unit 10: Future Threats 36. The Shifting Face of Violence 37. The Next Generation of Terror 38. Al Qaeda at 20: Dead or Alive? Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127610.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. CONTENTS Unit 1: The Concept of Terrorism 1. How to Define Terrorism 2. What Makes a Terrorist? 3. The Myth of the Invincible Terrorist Unit 2: Tactics of Terrorism 4. From the H-Bomb to the Human Bom 5. The Al Qaeda Weapons Race Continues 6. Terrorism and Extortion 7. Toy Soldiers Unit 3: State-Sponsored Terrorism 8. Rogue Operators 9. Iran’s Suicide Brigades 10. The Growing Syrian Missile Threat: Syria after Lebanon 11. Chavez Bides His Time Unit 4: International Terrorism 12. Trail of Terror 13. Peace at Last? 14. Tamil Tiger Trap 15. In Europe, Where’s the Hate? Unit 5: Terrorism in America 16. Incidents of Terrorism in the United States, 1997–2005 17. The Year in Hate 18. Green Rage 19. When Activists Attack 20. White-Pride Mom Unit 6: Terrorism and the Media 21. The Al-Qaeda Media Machine 22. Nets of Terror: Terrorist Activity on the Internet 23. Jihad with a Hip-Hop Pose Is an Easier Sell with Youth 24. The Globe of Villages 25. Congress and the “YouTube War” Unit 7: Terrorism and Religion 26. Qutbism: An Ideology of Islamic-Fascism 27. In Search of Moderate Muslims
NEW
*9780078127502* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES, EXPANDED 15th Edition Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland— College Park 2010 / Softcover / 416 pages ISBN: 9780078127502 Available: March 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127505.mhtml TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls. com. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ TS_Social_Issues_15eX.pdf v This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: Social Issues, 15/e Expanded with the corresponding chapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Witt, Hughes/Kroehler, and Schaefer. CONTENTS Unit 1 Culture and Values Issue 1. Is America in Moral Decline? Issue 2. Does the News Media Have a Liberal Bias? Issue 3. Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way of Life? Unit 2 Sex Roles, Gender, and the Family Issue 4. Does Divorce Have Long-Term Damaging Effects on Children? Issue 5. Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children? Issue 6. Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?
109
Sociology Unit 3 Stratification and Inequality Issue 7. Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem? Issue 8. Has Feminism Benefited American Society? Issue 9. Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness? Issue 10. Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to Girls and Women? Unit 4 Political Economy and Institutions Issue 11. Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist Economy? Issue 12. Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor? Issue 13. Is Competition the Reform That Will Fix Education? Issue 14. Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and Enhance Humans? Unit 5 Crime and Social Control Issue 15. Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime? Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Legalized? Issue 17. Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant the Curtailment of Civil Liberties? Unit 6 The Future: Population/Environment/Society Issue 18. Is Humankind Dangerously Harming the Environment? Issue 19. Is Globalization Good for Humankind? Issue 20. Is America Dominated by Big Business? Issue 21. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to Societal Obstacles? Issue 22. Is the World a Victim of American Cultural Imperialism?
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMS 08/09 36th Edition Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park 2009 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780073397689 Available: September 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397687.mhtml This Thirty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMS provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected from the best of the public press. Organizational features include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for each section; and an online instructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online. CONTENTS Unit 1: Introduction: The Nature of Social Problems and General Critiques of American Society 1. Social Problems: Definitions, Theories, and Analysis 2. The Fragmentation of Social Life, 3. How to Re-Moralize America Unit 2: Problems of the Political Economy Part A. The Polity 4. Who Rules America? 5. Inside the Hidden World of Earmarks 6. Our Incompetent Government 7. Rights, Liberties, and Security Part B. The Economy 8. Evaluating Economic Change 9. The New Rules 10. Debtor Nation 11. Born to Buy Part C. Problems of Place 12. Why Aren’t U.S. Cities Burning?0 13. Phantom Menace 14. The Invisible Ones Unit 3: Problems of Poverty and Inequality Part A. Inequality and the Poor
15. How Stratification Works 16. Goodbye 17. Can Extreme Poverty Be Eliminated? Part B. Welfare 18. Welfare Redux Part C. Racial and Ethnic Inequality and Issues 19. Virtual Equality 20. Why We Hate 21. American Dreamers Part D. Gender Inequalities and Issues 22. Great Expectations 23. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution 24. All Happy Families Unit 4: Institutional Problems Part A. The Family 25. The Frayed Knot 26. The Opt-Out Myth 27. (Rethinking) Gender 28. Overworked, Time Poor, and Abandoned by Uncle Sam 29. Peer Marriage Part B. Education 30. Against School 31. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold? Part C. Health 32. Fixing Hospitals, Robert Langreth 33. Medical Guesswork Unit 5: Crime, Law Enforcement, and Terrorism Part A. Crime 34. Fighting Crime 35. The Aggregate Burden of Crime 36. Drugs Part B. Law Enforcement 37. Causes and Consequences of Wrongful Convictions 38. Reforming Juvenile Justice 39. America Incarcerated Part C. Terrorism 40. Defeating Terrorism 41. Nightmare in Manhattan Unit 6: Problems of Population, Environment, Technology, and the Future Part A. Population and Environment Issues 42. Enough Already 43. SOS: We Need a Plan B 44. The Science of Climate Change Part B. Technological Issues 45. Who’s Afraid of Human Enhancement? 46. The Secret Nuclear War Part C. The Future 47. Update on the State of the Future 48. How Globalization Went Bad 49. Understanding Our Moment in History
110
Sociology TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS 3rd Edition
Marriage & the Family
Russell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer of US Military Academy Natasha E Bajema 2009 / 696 pages ISBN: 9780073379791 Available: February 2008
NEW
*9780073404363* PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER 6th Edition
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 794.mhtml In this new edition of TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM: UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS, Brigadier General (Retired) Russell Howard, Major Reid Sawyer and Natasha Bajema have collected original and previously published seminal articles and essays by political scientists, government officials, and members of the nation’s armed forces. The editors and several of the authors write from practical field experience in the nation’s war on terrorism. Others have had significant responsibility for planning government policy and responses. The contributors include a majority of the significant names in the field including John Arquilla, Richard Betts, Martha Crenshaw, Rohan Gunaratna, Bruce Hoffman and Paul Pillar. Part One of the book analyzes the philosophical, political, and religious roots of terrorist activities around the world and discusses the national, regional, and global effects of historical and recent acts of terrorism. In addition to material on the threats from suicide bombers, as well as chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear weapons, there are also important contributions analyzing new and growing threats such as genomic terrorism. Part Two deals with past, present, and future national and international responses to--and defenses against-terrorism. Essays and articles in this section analyze and debate the practical, political, ethical, and moral questions raised by military and non-military responses (and pre-emptive actions) outside of the context of declared war. This section has expanded on the previous edition to include three timely chapters on terrorism and the media, the role of the private sector, and winning the war on terrorism. CONTENTS Unit I Defining the Threat Chapter 1 Defining Terrorism: Means, Ends, and Motives Chapter 2 Understanding the Facilitators of Modern Terrorism Chapter 3 The New Terrorism Chapter 4 Religion and the Intersection with Terrorism Chapter 5 Modern Methods and Modes of Attack Unit II Countering the Terrorist Threat Chapter 6 Terrorism and the Media Chapter 7 The Challenges of Terrorism to a Free Society Chapter 8 Strategies and Approaches for Combating Terrorism Chapter 9 Leveraging the Role of the Private Sector Chapter 10 Winning the War on Terrorism
Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University 2010 / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073404363 Available: December 2009 This reader examines the family through two lenses--the familiar private family, in which we live our personal lives, and the public family, in which we deal with broader societal issues, such as raising the next generation, and the care of the elderly. Consequently, these readings look both at intimate, personal concerns, such as whether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental policies that affect families. The reader corresponds exactly to and is published concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and Private Families: An Introduction; both the textbook and the reader have 14 chapters of the same names. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Almost a third of the readings (8 of 28) are new to this edition. New readings include: “The Family in Trouble: Since When? For Whom?” (Steven M. Tipton and John Witte, eds.); “Fathers and Emotional Responsibility” (Andrea Doucet); “The Work-Home Crunch” (Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs); “Religion and Domestication of Men” (Bradford Wilcox); “Children’s Adjustment Following Divorce: Risk and Resilience Perspectives” (Joan B. Kelly and Robert E. Emery); and “Beyond the Two-Parent Family: How Teenagers Fare in Cohabiting Couple and Blended Families” (Sandi Nelson, Rebecca L. Clark, and Gregory Acs). v Chapter 8 (Work and Families) now includes an article from Contexts by Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs on trends in hours of paid work within a family. This article details findings from their book, “The Time Divide: Work, Gender, and Gender Inequality.” v A thoroughly revised and updated chapter on Domestic Violence features two new readings, “A Typology of Domestic Violence” (Michael P. Johnson) and “Controversies Surrounding Mandatory Arrest Policies and the Police Response to Intimate Partner Violence” (Amy Leisenring). v Chapter 12 (Divorce) now includes a reading from two psychologists who assert that in considering the effects of divorce on children, we must differentiate between pain (sad, painful memories of the event) and pathology (effects that cause problem’s in a child’s later life). CONTENTS (* indicates a new reading) Preface Part One: Introduction Chapter 1: Public and Private Families Chapter 2: The History of the Family Part Two: Gender, Class, and Race-Ethnicity Chapter 3: Gender and Families Chapter 4: Social Class and Families Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and Families Part Three: Sexuality, Partnership, and Marriage Chapter 6: Sexualities Chapter 7: Cohabitation and Marriage Chapter 8: Work and Families
111
Sociology FAMILIES: A SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE
Part Four: Links across the Generations Chapter 9: Children and Parents Chapter 10: The Elderly and Their Families Part Five: Conflict, Disruption, and Reconstitution Chapter 11: Domestic Violence Chapter 12: Divorce Chapter 13: Remarriage and Stepfamilies Part Six: Family and Society Chapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social Policy
David M Newman, Depauw University 2009 / Hardcover / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073404165 Available: October 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/newman1 Sociology of Families is an exciting new text from David Newman that successfully connects to students’ personal lives while showing how sociologists understand and explain families. It is not only informative in terms of current sociological knowledge of families, but meaningful in terms of contemporary family debates and applicable to students’ own family experiences. What Does it All Mean?, Going Global, and See for Yourself sections appear throughout the text allowing students to think and perform experiments like sociologists to explore theoretical concepts to better understand their own family lives as well as those of others.
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY: THE QUEST FOR INTIMACY 7th Edition Robert H Lauer and Jeanette C Lauer of Alliant International University 2009 / Softcover / 496 pages ISBN: 9780073404288 Available: October 2008
CONTENTS
http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf7 Marriage & Family combines a positive and practical approach to the study of marriage and family life with a manageable amount of sociological theory and research citations. The text not only provides students with a basic understanding of marriage and family life but helps them apply the knowledge to enrich their lives and nurture their own intimate relationships. CONTENTS List of Figures List of Tables Preface A Guided Tour Part One. The Context of Intimacy l. Marriage and Family in America: Needs, Myths, and Dreams 2. Diversity in Families 3. Gender Roles: Foundation for Intimacy 4. Sexuality Part Two: Seeking Intimate Relationships 5. Getting Involved 6. Falling in Love 7. Selecting a Life Partner Part Three: The Intimate Couple 8. Getting Married 9. The Challenge of Communication 10. Power and Conflict in Marriage 11. Work and Home Part Four: Intimacy in Families 12. Becoming a Parent 13. The Family Life Cycle Part Five: Challenges to Intimacy 14. Family Crises 15. Separation and Divorce 16. Remarriage and Stepfamilies Epilogue: The Quest Revisited: Why Bother? Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject Index
Part I Families And Society 1 Defining Families 2 Declining and Enduring Families 3 Measuring Families Part II Families and Social Inequalities 4 Gendered Families 5 Diverse Families/Similar Families 6 Unequal Families Part III Families and Relationships 7 Love, Sexuality, and Relationship Formation 8 Marriage and Cohabitation 9 Work and Family Part IV Families Over The Life Course 10 Entering Parenthood 11Childhood and Adolescence 12 Adulthood and Later Life Part V Families and Challenges 13 Intimate Violence 14 Divorce and Remarriage 15 Change, Stability, and Future Families
112
Sociology
Marriage & the Family – Readers
NEW
*9780078135880* ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILY 10/11 36th Edition Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana UniversityBloomington 2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078135880 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078135885.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_The_Family_1011.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: The Family 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in two of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Family textbooks by Newman and DeGonova/ Rice.
UNIT 3: Family Relationships Part A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships 13. Free As a Bird and Loving It 14. Gay Marriage Lite 15. Two Mommies and a Daddy Part B. Relationships between Parents and Children 16. Good Parents, Bad Results 17. Do We Need a Law to Prohibit Spanking? 18. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents 19. Prickly Pere Part C. Other Family Relationships 20. The Forgotten Siblings 21. Being a Sibling 22. Aunties and Uncles 23. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural Crisis UNIT 4: Challenges and Opportunities Part A. Family Violence and Chaos 24. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse 25. Domestic Abuse Myths Part B. Substance Abuse 26. Children of Alcoholics 27. Impact of Family Recovery and Pre-Teens and Adolescents Part C. Infidelity 28. My Cheatin’ Heart 29. Love But Don’t Touch 30. Is This Man Cheating on His Wife? Part D. Economic Concerns 31. The Opt-Out-Myth 32. Making Time for Family Time Part E. Illness and Death in the Family 33. Partners Face Cancer Together 34. Dealing Day-to-Day With Diabetes: A Whole Family Experience 35. Caring for the Caregiver 36. Bereavement after Caregiving 37. Love, Loss—And Love Part F. War the Stress of Separation 38. Stressors Afflicting Families During Military Deployment 39. Children of the Wars Part F. Divorce and Remarriage 40. A Divided House 41. Civil Wars 42. Stepfamily Success Depends on Ingredients UNIT 5: Families, Now and into the Future 43. Get a Closer Look 44. The Joy of Rituals 45. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades 46. The Consumer Crunch 47. Sparking Interest in Nature—Family Style Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
CONTENTS UNIT 1: Evolving Perspectives on the Family 1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience 2. Interracial Families 3. Children as a Public Good 4. Family Partnerships UNIT 2: Exploring and Establishing Relationships Part A. Love and Sex 5. This Thing Called Love 6. Pillow Talk 7. 24 Things Love and Sex Experts are Dying to Tell You Part B. Choosing a Mate 8. On-Again, Off-Again Part C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation 9. Fats, Carbs and the Science of Conception 10. Starting the Good Life in the Womb 11. Not Always ‘the Happiest Time’ 12. Adopting a New American Family
113
Sociology
Sociology of Family
NEW
*9780073515403* NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS 8th Edition
*9780073404356* PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: AN INTRODUCTION 6th Edition
Elizabeth Schroeder 2010 / Softcover / 320 pages ISBN: 9780073515403 Available: October 2009
Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University 2010 / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073404356 Available: November 2009
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351540x.mhtml
www.mhhe.com/cherlin6e
TAKING SIDES: FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS, 8/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.
Nationally recognized for its sound scholarship and balanced approach and written by one of the leading authorities in the field, this text examines the family through two lenses: the familiar private family in which we live most of our personal lives, and the public family in which we, as adults, deal with broader societal issues such as the care of the elderly, the increase in divorce, and childbearing outside of marriage. The book looks at intimate personal concerns, such as whether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental policies that affect families. Distinctive chapters - Chapter 9, “Children and Parents;” Chapter 10, “Older Persons and Their Families;” and Chapter 14, “The Family, the State and Social Policy” - examine issues of great current interest, such as income assistance to poor families, the effects of out-of-home childcare, and the costs of the Social Security and Medicare programs. NEW TO THIS EDITION v An updated theory section stresses the four perspectives that are most widely used in sociology of the family: exchange theory, symbolic interaction theory, feminist theory, and postmodern theory. v Added coverage of “master identity,” “hooking up,” “Multiple Partner Fertility,” the role of a woman’s salary in family life, and a broader discussion of stepfamilies address important contemporary issues impacting families. v New Families and Public Policy essays include “Do Employers Discriminate Against Women?”, “Do Children Have Rights?”, and “Homelessness by the Numbers.” v A number of new “Families Across Cultures” essays have been added or expanded, including “Asia’s Missing Girls”, “Moving up by Sending Children Abroad,” and “The Child Care Crisis in Low-Income Countries.” v New material on the transformation of Barack Obama’s image in the African-American community during the presidential campaign, to the acceptance of his authenticity as a symbol of African-American accomplishments, reflects the belief that race is a social construct rather than a natural one. v Streamlined organization distributes the content of the prior edition’s chapter 15, Social Change and Families, throughout the text, adding a new discussion of postmodern life and its consequences for families in Chapter 1. CONTENTS Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Public and Private Families Chapter 2: The History of the Family Part II: Gender, Class, and Race-Ethnicity Chapter 3: Gender and Families Chapter 4: Social Class and Families Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity, and Families
114
Sociology Part III: Sexuality, Partnership, and Marriage Chapter 6: Sexualities Chapter 7: Cohabitation and Marriage Chapter 8: Work and Families Part IV: Links Across the Generations Chapter 9: Children and Parents Chapter 10: The Elderly and Their Families Part V: Conflict, Disruption, and Reconstitution Chapter 11: Domestic Violence Chapter 12: Divorce Chapter 13: Remarriage and Stepfamilies Part VI: Family and Society Chapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social Policy Chapter 15: Social Change and Families
CONTENTS Part One: Introduction Chapter 1: Public and Private Families Chapter 2: The History of the Family Part Two: Gender, Class, and Race-Ethnicity Chapter 3: Gender and Families Chapter 4: Social Class and Families Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and Families Part Three: Sexuality, Partnership, and Marriage Chapter 6: Sexualities Chapter 7: Cohabitation and Marriage Chapter 8: Work and Families Part Four: Links across the Generations Chapter 9: Children and Parents Chapter 10: The Elderly and Their Families Part Five: Conflict, Disruption, and Reconstitution Chapter 11: Domestic Violence Chapter 12: Divorce Chapter 13: Remarriage and Stepfamilies Part Six: Family and Society Chapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social Policy
NEW
*9780073404363* PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER 6th Edition Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University 2010 / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073404363 Available: December 2009 This reader examines the family through two lenses--the familiar private family, in which we live our personal lives, and the public family, in which we deal with broader societal issues, such as raising the next generation, and the care of the elderly. Consequently, these readings look both at intimate, personal concerns, such as whether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental policies that affect families. The reader corresponds exactly to and is published concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and Private Families: An Introduction; both the textbook and the reader have 14 chapters of the same names. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Almost a third of the readings (8 of 28) are new to this edition. New readings include: “The Family in Trouble: Since When? For Whom?” (Steven M. Tipton and John Witte, eds.); “Fathers and Emotional Responsibility” (Andrea Doucet); “The Work-Home Crunch” (Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs); “Religion and Domestication of Men” (Bradford Wilcox); “Children’s Adjustment Following Divorce: Risk and Resilience Perspectives” (Joan B. Kelly and Robert E. Emery); and “Beyond the Two-Parent Family: How Teenagers Fare in Cohabiting Couple and Blended Families” (Sandi Nelson, Rebecca L. Clark, and Gregory Acs). v Chapter 8 (Work and Families) now includes an article from Contexts by Kathleen Gerson and Jerry A. Jacobs on trends in hours of paid work within a family. This article details findings from their book, “The Time Divide: Work, Gender, and Gender Inequality.” v A thoroughly revised and updated chapter on Domestic Violence features two new readings, “A Typology of Domestic Violence” (Michael P. Johnson) and “Controversies Surrounding Mandatory Arrest Policies and the Police Response to Intimate Partner Violence” (Amy Leisenring). v Chapter 12 (Divorce) now includes a reading from two psychologists who assert that in considering the effects of divorce on children, we must differentiate between pain (sad, painful memories of the event) and pathology (effects that cause problem’s in a child’s later life).
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY: THE QUEST FOR INTIMACY 7th Edition Robert H Lauer and Jeanette C Lauer of Alliant International University 2009 / Softcover / 496 pages ISBN: 9780073404288 Available: October 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf7 Marriage & Family combines a positive and practical approach to the study of marriage and family life with a manageable amount of sociological theory and research citations. The text not only provides students with a basic understanding of marriage and family life but helps them apply the knowledge to enrich their lives and nurture their own intimate relationships. CONTENTS List of Figures List of Tables Preface A Guided Tour Part One. The Context of Intimacy l. Marriage and Family in America: Needs, Myths, and Dreams 2. Diversity in Families 3. Gender Roles: Foundation for Intimacy 4. Sexuality Part Two: Seeking Intimate Relationships 5. Getting Involved 6. Falling in Love 7. Selecting a Life Partner Part Three: The Intimate Couple 8. Getting Married 9. The Challenge of Communication 10. Power and Conflict in Marriage 11. Work and Home Part Four: Intimacy in Families 12. Becoming a Parent 13. The Family Life Cycle Part Five: Challenges to Intimacy 14. Family Crises 15. Separation and Divorce 16. Remarriage and Stepfamilies Epilogue: The Quest Revisited: Why Bother? Glossary
115
Sociology
Sociology of Family – Readers
References Credits Name Index Subject Index
FAMILIES: A SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE David M Newman, Depauw University 2009 / Hardcover / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073404165 Available: October 2008
NEW
*9780078135880*
http://www.mhhe.com/newman1 Sociology of Families is an exciting new text from David Newman that successfully connects to students’ personal lives while showing how sociologists understand and explain families. It is not only informative in terms of current sociological knowledge of families, but meaningful in terms of contemporary family debates and applicable to students’ own family experiences. What Does it All Mean?, Going Global, and See for Yourself sections appear throughout the text allowing students to think and perform experiments like sociologists to explore theoretical concepts to better understand their own family lives as well as those of others. CONTENTS Part I Families And Society 1 Defining Families 2 Declining and Enduring Families 3 Measuring Families Part II Families and Social Inequalities 4 Gendered Families 5 Diverse Families/Similar Families 6 Unequal Families Part III Families and Relationships 7 Love, Sexuality, and Relationship Formation 8 Marriage and Cohabitation 9 Work and Family Part IV Families Over The Life Course 10 Entering Parenthood 11Childhood and Adolescence 12 Adulthood and Later Life Part V Families and Challenges 13 Intimate Violence 14 Divorce and Remarriage 15 Change, Stability, and Future Families
ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILY 10/11 36th Edition Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana UniversityBloomington 2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078135880 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078135885.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_The_Family_1011.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: The Family 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in two of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Family textbooks by Newman and DeGonova/ Rice. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Evolving Perspectives on the Family 1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience 2. Interracial Families 3. Children as a Public Good 4. Family Partnerships UNIT 2: Exploring and Establishing Relationships Part A. Love and Sex 5. This Thing Called Love 6. Pillow Talk 7. 24 Things Love and Sex Experts are Dying to Tell You Part B. Choosing a Mate 8. On-Again, Off-Again Part C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation 9. Fats, Carbs and the Science of Conception 10. Starting the Good Life in the Womb 11. Not Always ‘the Happiest Time’ 12. Adopting a New American Family UNIT 3: Family Relationships Part A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships 13. Free As a Bird and Loving It
116
Sociology 14. Gay Marriage Lite 15. Two Mommies and a Daddy Part B. Relationships between Parents and Children 16. Good Parents, Bad Results 17. Do We Need a Law to Prohibit Spanking? 18. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents 19. Prickly Pere Part C. Other Family Relationships 20. The Forgotten Siblings 21. Being a Sibling 22. Aunties and Uncles 23. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural Crisis UNIT 4: Challenges and Opportunities Part A. Family Violence and Chaos 24. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse 25. Domestic Abuse Myths Part B. Substance Abuse 26. Children of Alcoholics 27. Impact of Family Recovery and Pre-Teens and Adolescents Part C. Infidelity 28. My Cheatin’ Heart 29. Love But Don’t Touch 30. Is This Man Cheating on His Wife? Part D. Economic Concerns 31. The Opt-Out-Myth 32. Making Time for Family Time Part E. Illness and Death in the Family 33. Partners Face Cancer Together 34. Dealing Day-to-Day With Diabetes: A Whole Family Experience 35. Caring for the Caregiver 36. Bereavement after Caregiving 37. Love, Loss—And Love Part F. War the Stress of Separation 38. Stressors Afflicting Families During Military Deployment 39. Children of the Wars Part F. Divorce and Remarriage 40. A Divided House 41. Civil Wars 42. Stepfamily Success Depends on Ingredients UNIT 5: Families, Now and into the Future 43. Get a Closer Look 44. The Joy of Rituals 45. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades 46. The Consumer Crunch 47. Sparking Interest in Nature—Family Style Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW
*9780073515403* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS 8th Edition Elizabeth Schroeder 2010 / Softcover / 320 pages ISBN: 9780073515403 Available: March 2009
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351540x.mhtml TAKING SIDES: FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS, 8/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.
117
Sociology
Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality RECONSTRUCTING GENDER: A MULTICULTURAL ANTHOLOGY 5th Edition Estelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston 2009 / Softcover / 720 pages ISBN: 9780073380063 Available: January 2008
Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5 Reconstructing Gender is an anthology that addresses the contemporary experiences from a variety of women and men. Drawing from a wide range of sources including research articles, critical essays, and personal narratives, Disch has chosen accessible, engaging, and provocative readings that represent many perspectives and experiences. Eleven part-opening introductions identify important issues in the general field of study, describe the readings, remind the reader about some of the central themes emerging throughout the book, and raise questions for students to consider. CONTENTS * indicates new reading General Introduction Part I: It’s not just about Gender 1. The Puerto Rican Dummy and the Merciful Son, Martín Espada 2. From Nothing, A Consciousness, Helen Zia 3. The Past is Ever Present: Recognizing the New Racism, Patricia Hill Collins 4. Angry Women Are Building: Issues and Struggles Facing American Indian Women Today, Paula Gunn Allen 5. “J.A.P.”-Slapping: The Politics of Scapegoating, Ruth Atkin and Adrienne Rich *6. Latinas in the Fault Lines of Citizenship, Alejandra Marchevsky and Jeanne Theoharis 7. White Privilege: Unpacking the Invisible Knapsack, Peggy McIntosh 8. Controlled or Autonomous: Identity and the Experience of the Network, Women Living Under Muslim Laws, Farida Shaheed *9. Under and (Inside) Western Eyes: At the Turn of the Century, Chandra Talpade Mohanty 10. Patriarchy, the System: An It, Not a He, a Them or an Us, Allan Johnson Part II: Gender Socialization 11. The Social Construction of Gender, Judith Lorber 12. Boyhood, Organized Sports, and the Construction of Masculinities, Michael A. Messner 13. Who’s the Fairest of Them All?, Jill Nelson 14. He Defies You Still: The Memoirs of a Sissy, Tommi Avicolli 15. Growing Up Hidden, Linnea Due *16. Masculinity as Homophobia, Michael Kimmel Part III: Embodiment *17. Making Up Is Hard To Do, Sheila Jeffreys 18. “A Way Outa No Way”: Eating Problems among African American, Latina, and White Women, Becky W. Thompson 19. Yellow Woman and a Beauty of the Spirit, Leslie Marmon Silko 20. Just Walk on By: A Black Man Ponders His Power to Alter Public Space, Brent Staples 21. Taking It, Leonard Kriegel 22. I’m Not Fat, I’m Latina, Christy Haubegger 23. The Tyranny of the Esthetic: Surgery’s Most Intimate Violation, Martha A. Coventry Part IV: Communication 24. For the White Person Who Wants to Know How to Be My Friend, Pat Parker
*25. Men and Women are from Earth, Rosalind Barnett and Caryl Rivers 26. Real Men Don’t Cry … and Other “Uncool” Myths, Phil W. Petrie 27. The New Momism, Susan J. Douglas and Meredith W. Michaels 28. Claiming Jezebel: Black Female Subjectivity and Sexual Expressions in Hip-Hop, Ayana Byrd 29. Where are the women? The strange case of the missing feminists. When was the last time you saw one on TV?, Laura Zimmerman Part V: Sexuality *30. A Pornographic World [What is normal?], Robert Jensen 31. The Myth of the Sexual Athlete, Don Sabo *32. Passing Last Summer, Domenika Bednarska 33. The Impact of Multiple Marginalization, Paula C. Rust Part VI: Families *34. Contemporary Challenges to Black Women’s Reproductive Rights, Jeanne Flavin 35. Bloodmothers, Othermothers, and Women-Centered Networks, Patricia Hill Collins 36. Dilemmas of Involved Fatherhood, Kathleen Gerson 37. Man Child: A Black Lesbian Feminist’s Response, Audre Lorde 38. I Am a Man, Raul E. Ybarra 39. What is marriage for?, E.J. Graff *40. Free to Marry, At Last—May 17, 2004, Pat Gozemba and Karen Kahn Part VII: Education 41. Missing in Interaction, Myra and David Sadker 42. “What About the Boys?” What the Current Debates Tell Us--and Don’t Tell Us--About Boys in Schools, Michael S. Kimmel 43. Does Gender Matter?, Ben A. Barres 44. Black and Female: Reflections on Graduate School, bell hooks *45. Mentors in Violence Program, Jackson Katz Part VIII: Paid Work and Unemployment *46. The End of Welfare as We Know It: An Overview of the PRWORA, Alejandra Marchevsky and Jeanne Theoharis 47. Sixty Cents to a Man’s Dollar, Ann Crittenden 48. “Global Woman” by Barbara Ehrenreich and Arlie Russell Hochschild 49. America’s Dirty Work: Migrant Maids and Modern-Day Slavery, Joy M. Zarembka 50. The Globetrotting Sneaker, Cynthia Enloe *51. The Center of Masculine Production: Gay Athletes in Professional Sports, Eric Anderson *52. Men at War: Vietnam and Agent Orange, Cynthia R. Daniels *53. Fort Bragg: Command, Jeffrey McGowan Part IX: Violence 54. Women, Violence, and Resistance, Melanie Kaye/Kantrowitz *55. Eminem’s Popularity is a Major Setback for Girls and Women, Jackson Katz *56. Pictures of Boyhood, Richard Hoffman *57. Injury, Gender, and Trouble, Laurie Schaffner 58. Homophobia in Straight Men, Terry A. Kupers 59. The Ultimate Growth Industry: Trafficking in Women and Girls, Jan Goodwin 60. How Safe Is America?, Desiree Taylor 61. Wielding Masculinity Inside Abu Ghraib: Making Feminist Sense of an American Military Scandal, Cynthia Enloe *62. The Private War of Women Soldiers, Helen Benedict Part X: Health and Illness 63. Masculinities and Men’s Health: Moving toward Post—Superman Era Prevention, Don Sabo *64. Health Care Reform – A Woman’s Issue, Catherine DeLowry, Dr.PH 65. Reproductive Issues Are Essential Survival Issues for the AsianAmerican Communities, Connie S. Chan 66. Why the Precautionary Principle? A Meditation on Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and the Breasts of Mothers, Sandra Steingraber 67. Does Silencio = Muerte? Notes on Translating the AIDS Epidemic, Rafael Campo 68. To Be Poor and Transgender, Kai Wright
118
Sociology Part XI: A World That Is Truly Human 69. Statement of Principles, National Organization for Men Against Sexism *70. New Black Man, Mark Anthony Neal *71. Feminism’s Future: Young Feminists of Color Take the Mic, Daisy Hernández and Pandora L. Leong *72. Tapping Our Strength, Eisa Nefertari Ulen *73. The Women’s Peace Movement in Israel, Gila Svirsky *74. Women and Human Rights, Rita Arditti
THE SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF DIFFERENCE AND INEQUALITY: RACE, CLASS, GENDER AND SEXUALITY 4th Edition Tracy E Ore, St Cloud State University 2009 / Softcover / 816 pages ISBN: 9780073380087 Available: February 2008
Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4 This anthology examines the social construction of race, class, gender, and sexuality and the institutional bases for these relations. While other texts discuss various forms of stratification and the impact of these on members of marginalized groups, Ore provides a thorough discussion of how such systems of stratification are formed and perpetuated and how forms of stratification are interconnected. Critical thinking questions at the end of each reading and part opening essays aid students in understanding how the material relates to their lives and how their own attitudes, actions, and perspectives may serve to perpetuate a stratified system. 13 new readings have been added focusing on the experiences of immigrants, contemporary issues in social institutions, current examples of how the media portrays events and much more.
EXPERIENCING RACE, CLASS, AND GENDER IN THE UNITED STATES 5th Edition Roberta Fiske-Rusciano, Rider University 2009 / Softcover / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073528144 Available: July 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/fiske5 Through individual stories, essays, and critical analyses, this anthology introduces issues of race, class, and gender within an interdisciplinary framework. Themes of identity, power, and change are examined from many different perspectives and voices. New articles covering environmental and post-Katrina issues provide the reader with information about recent concerns of Americans living in the United States. CONTENTS Identity Part I: Racial and Ethnic Identity Part II: Gender Identity Part III: Sexual Identity Power Part V: Power and Racism Part VI: Power and Sexism Part VII Power and Classism Change Part VIII: Taking Action Part IX: Change Makers Part X: Race, Class, and Gender After 9/11 and Post-Katrina
CONTENTS * An asterisk indicates a new reading. Preface Part I: Constructing Differences Race & Ethnicity 1. Racial Formations- Michael Omi and Howard Winant 2. Optional Ethnicities: For Whites Only?- Mary C. Waters *3. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from Immigrant Communities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen 4. How Jews Became White Folks and What that Says about Race in America- Karen Brodkin Social Class 5. Race, Wealth, and Equality- Melvin L. Oliver and Thomas M. Shapiro 6. Media Magic: Making Class Invisible- Gregory Mantsios *7. Doubly Divided: The Racial Wealth Gap- Meizhu Lui *8. Getting Corporations off the Public Dole- Janice Shields Sex & Gender 9. The Social Construction of Gender- Judith Lorber *10. The Five Sexes, Revisited- Anne Fausto-Sterling 11. The Transgender Paradigm Shift toward Free Expression- Holly Boswell 12. Masculinity as Homophobia: Fear, Shame, and Silence in the Construction of Gender Identity- Michael S. Kimmel Sexuality 13. The Invention of Heterosexuality- Jonathan Ned Katz *14. Sexuality and Gender in Children’s Daily Worlds- Barrie Thorne and Zella Luria 15. Sexual Identity and Bisexual Identities: The Struggle for SelfDescription in a Changing Sexual Landscape- Paula C. Rust 16. Naming All the Parts- Kate Bornstein Part II: Maintaining Inequalities: Systems of Oppression & Privilege Social Institutions Family 17. Our Mothers’ Grief: Racial Ethnic Women and the Maintenance of Families- Bonnie Thornton Dill 18. Families on the Fault Line: America’s Working Class Speaks About the Family, the Economy, Race, and Ethnicity- Lillian B. Rubin 19. Stability and Change in Chicano Men’s Family Lives- Scott Coltrane *20. Gay and Lesbian Families Are Here- Judith Stacey Education 21. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools- Jonathan Kozol 22. Preparing for Power: Cultural Capital and Curricula in America’s Elite Boarding Schools- Peter W. Cookson, Jr and Caroline Hodges Persell
119
Sociology 23. Civilize Them with a Stick- Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes 24. Missing in Interaction- Myra Sadker and David Sadker *25. Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality- Melinda Miceli Work & the Economy 26. Jobless Ghettos: The Social Implications of the Disappearance of Work in Segregated Neighborhoods- William J. Wilson 27. “We’d Love to Hire Them But?”: The Meaning of Race for Employers- Joleen Kirschenman and Kathryn M. Neckerman 28. The Glass Escalator: Hidden Advantages for Men in the ‘Female’ Professions- Christine L. Williams 29. Cause of Death: Inequality- Alejandro Reuss The State & Public Policy *30. Welfare Reform, Family Hardship, and Women of Color- Linda Burnham *31. Beyond Crime and Punishment- Bruce Western and Becky Petit 32. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American Television Domestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch 33. The Effects of Affirmative Action on Other Stakeholders- Barbara Reskin 34. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness: Racialized Social Democracy and the “White” Problem in American Studies- George Lipsitz Media 35. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TV Domestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch 36. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment- Robert *37. Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces: Will and Grace and the Situation Comedy Genre- Kathleen Battles and Wendy HiltonMorrow *38. Metahors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames, and Their Consequences in Hurricane Katrina- Kathleen Tierney, Christine Bevc, and Erica Kuligowski Language & Culture 39. Racism in the English Language- Robert B. Moore 40. Self, Identity & the Naming Question: Reflections on the Language of Disability- Irving Kenneth Zola 41. How to Tame a Wild Tongue- Gloria Anzaldúa 42. The Dark Side of Sports Symbols- Stanley D. Eitzen and Maxine Baca Zinn Violence & Social Control 43. Where Race and Gender Meet: Racism, Hate Crimes, and Pornography- Helen Zia 44. Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why are Some Fraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?- A. Ayres Boswell & Joan Z. Spade 45. The Construction of Masculinity and the Triad of Men’s ViolenceMichael Kaufman 46. Homophobia as a Weapon of Sexism- Suzanne Pharr Part III: Experiencing Difference & Inequality in Everyday Life 47. Making Systems of Privilege Visible- Stephanie M. Wildman with Adrienne D. Davis. 48. “Yes, I Follow Islam, But I’m Not a Terrorist”- Nada El Sawy 49. A Dozen Demons- Ellis Cose *50. Always Running- La Vida Loca, Gang Days in L.A.- Luis Rodriguez 51. The Story of My Body- Judith Ortiz Cofer *52. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from Immigrant Communities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen 53. “Gee, You Don’t Seem Like An Indian From the Reservation”Barbara Cameron *54. Living Fearlessly With and Within Differences: My Search for Identity Beyond Categories and Contradictions- Shefali MilczarekDesai 55. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting by in America- Barbara Ehrenreich 56. I Am Your Welfare Reform- Annie Downey 57. Learning to Fight- Geoffrey Canada 58. Bisexuality, Feminism, Men, and Me- Robyn Ochs Part IV: Resistance & Social Change 59. Toward a New Vision: Race, Class, and Gender as Categories of Analysis and Connection- Patricia Hill Collins
60. Cultural Resistance: Reconstructing Our Own Images- Yen Le Espritu *61.Good for the Hood?- Anmol Chaddha 62. Seeing More Than Black & White: Latinos, Racism, and the Cultural Divides- Elizabeth Martinez *63. How White People Can Serve as Allies to People of Color in the Struggle to End Racism- Paul Kivel 64. Dismantling Noah’s Ark: Gender and Equality- Judith Lorber *65. Voices of a New Movimiento- Roberto Lovato Index * An asterisk indicates a new reading.
THE MEANING OF DIFFERENCE: AMERICAN CONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE, SEX AND GENDER, SOCIAL CLASS, AND SEXUAL ORIENTATION 5th Edition Karen E Rosenblum, George Mason University Toni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University 2009 / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073380056 Available: January 2008
Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5 The Meaning of Difference focuses on the social construction of difference as it operates in American formulations of race and ethnicity, sex and gender, social class, sexual orientation, and disability. The conceptual structure of this text-reader comes from four framework essays addressing the construction of difference, the experience of difference, the social meaning of difference, and social action that might bridge differences. Each framework essay is followed by a set of readings selected for readability, conceptual depth, and applicability to a variety of statuses. Boxed inserts throughout offer first-person accounts from real people, many of them students. This edition features an expanded focus on disability and 29 new readings, including articles on how immigration is transforming the nature of American race and ethnic categories, the changing shape of higher education, and the experience of Americans of MiddleEastern descent. CONTENTS Section I - Framework Essay: Constructing Categories Of Difference What is Race? What Is Sex? What Is Gender? What Is Social Class? What Is Sexual Orientation? What is Disability? Section II - Framework Essay: Experiencing Difference Race and Ethnicity Sex and Gender Sexual Orientation Social Class Disability Section III - Framework Essay: The Meaning Of Difference Intersectionality Law, Politics, and Policy Language Section IV - Framework Essay: Bridging Differences
120
Sociology
NEW
*9780078050527* ANNUAL EDITIONS: GENDER 10/11 Bobby Hutchison
2010 / 272 pages ISBN: 9780078050527 Available: September 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078050529.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
Shapes Men’s Gender Ideology Part B. Gender and Health 24. A Woman’s Curse? 25. Body Dissatisfaction in Adolescent Females and Males: Risk and Resilience 26. When Sex Hurts 27. Health Behaviors, Prostate Cancer, and Masculinities: A Life Course Perspective UNIT 5: Genders and Sexualities 28. (Rethinking) Gender 29. Progress and Politics in the Intersex Rights Movement: Feminist Theory in Action 30. What Do Women Want? 31. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the More They Stay the Same 32. Peer Marriage 33. State of Our Unions: Marriage Promotion and the Contested Power of Heterosexuality 34. Five Years on, Gay Marriage Debate Fades in Massachusetts 35. Everyone’s Queer 36. The Berdache Tradition 37. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents UNIT 6: Gender and Social Issues 38. Flower Grandma’s Secret 39. Sexual Assault on Campus: What Colleges and Universities Are Doing about It 40. Male Rape Myths: The Role of Gender, Violence, and Sexism 41. Effects of Sexual Assaults on Men: Physical, Mental, and Sexual Consequences 42. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution 43. Fall Girls 44. Women, Citizens, Muslims 45. Beyond Hillary: Strength in Numbers Ann Friedman Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
CONTENTS UNIT 1: Theoretical and Research Perspectives 1. The Social Construction of Gender 2. Framed before We Know It: How Gender Shapes Social Relations 3. Gender Is Powerful: The Long Reach of Feminism 4. The World, the Flesh and the Devil 5. A Case for Angry Men and Happy Women 6. Beauty, Gender and Stereotypes: Evidence from Laboratory Experiments 7. I’m Not a Very Manly Man: Qualitative Insights into Young Men’s Masculine Subjectivity UNIT 2: Gender and Development 8. Gender and Group Process: A Developmental Perspective 9. Gender Bender 10. The Secret Lives of Single Women 11. Goodbye to Girlhood, 12. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior 13. How Many Fathers Are Best for a Child? 14. What Autistic Girls Are Made of UNIT 3: Gender and Education 15. Learning and Gender 16. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development 17. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating Gender-Friendly Middle School Classrooms 18. Female Faculty in Male-Dominated Fields: Law, Medicine, and Engineering 19. Scaling the Ivory Towers UNIT 4: Gender, Work, and Health Part A. Gender and Work 20. The Emperor’s New Woes 21. The Media Depiction of Women Who Opt Out 22. Great Expectations 23. Labor Markets, Breadwinning, and Beliefs: How Economic Context
121
Sociology
Medical Sociology – Readers
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN GENDER 4th Edition Jacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro 2009 / Softcover / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073515298 Available: March 2008
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtml This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to controversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent the arguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators, reflect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their liveliness and substance and because of their value in a debate framework. Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally and politically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKING SIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts, presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and public discourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills by analyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments. The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what is gender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover that what might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is so much more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only) accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have been provided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teaching suggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teaching hints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion around the themes raised by the clashing essays. CONTENTS Unit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving Target Issue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny? Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate? Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and Sciences Have a Biological Basis? Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of Difference Issue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different? Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and Men Innately Determined? Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responses to Stress Gender-Based? Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and Men Issue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender? Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levels of Violence Against Intimate Partners? Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape? Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender in Childhood Issue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry? Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parents for Children? Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being? Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society? Unit 5 From 9 to 5: Gender in the World of Work Issue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) Improve Women’s Lives? Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in the Workplace? Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified? Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due to Societal Obstacles? Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards? Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong? Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message to Teens? Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional Gender Constraints?
NEW
*9780073545660* TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON BIOETHICAL ISSUES 13th Edition Carol Levine, United Hospital Fund 2010 / Softcover / 368 pages ISBN: 9780073545660 Available: February 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007354566x.mhtml TAKING SIDES: BIOETHICAL ISSUES, 13/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls. com. CONTENTS Unit 1 Medical Decision Making Issue 1. Is Informed Consent Still Central to Medical Ethics? Issue 2. Should Truth-Telling Depend on the Patient’s Culture? Issue 3. Does Direct-to-Consumer Drug Advertising Enhance Patient Choice? Unit 2 End-of-Life Dilemmas Issue 4. Have Advanced Directives Failed? Issue 5. Do Standard Medical Ethics Apply in Disaster Conditions? Issue 6. Should Physicians Be Allowed to Assist in Patient Suicide? Issue 7. Should Doctors Be Able to Refuse Demands for “Futile” Treatment? Unit 3 Choices in Reproduction Issue 8. Is Abortion Immoral? Issue 9. Should a Pregnant Woman Be Punished for Exposing Her Fetus to Risk? Unit 4 Children, Adolescents, and Bioethics Issue 10. Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Make Their Own Lifeand-Death Decisions? Issue 11. Is It Ethical to Use Steroids and Surgery to Stunt Disabled Children’s Growth? Issue 12. Should Vaccination for HPV Be Mandated for Teenage Girls? Unit 5 Genetics Issue 13. Is Genetic Enhancement an Unacceptable Use of Technology? Issue 14. Are Experiments That Combine Animal and Human Genes Ethical? Unit 6 Human Experimentation Issue 15. Should Prisoners Be Allowed to Participate in Research? Issue 16. Should New Drugs Be Given to Patients Outside Clinical Trials? Unit 7 Bioethics and Public Policy
122
Sociology Issue 17. Does Military Necessity Override Medical Ethics? Issue 18. Should Performance-Enhancing Drugs Be Banned from Sports? Issue 19. Is It Ethical to Remove Patients’ Hearts for Transplantation Immediately after Cardiac Death? Issue 20. Should Pharmacists Be Allowed to Deny Prescriptions on Grounds of Conscience? Issue 21. Should Public Health Override Powers over Individual Liberty in Combatting Bioterrorism?
NEW
*9780078127731* ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 09/10 22nd Edition Harold Cox, Indiana State University-Terre Haute
Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers
2010 / Softcover / 224 pages ISBN: 9780078127731 Available: March 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127734.mhtml
NEW
*9780078050596* ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 10/11 23rd Edition Harold Cox 2011 / 224 pages ISBN: 9780078050596 Available: March 2010
www.mhhe.com/annualeditions Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors and is available in print or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_Aging_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Aging 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Aging textbooks by Hoyer/Roodin. CONTENTS Unit 1: The Phenomenon of Aging 1. Elderly Americans 2. New Age Thinking 3. Living Longer: Diet and Exercise 4. Living Healthy to 100 5. Will You Live to Be 100? 6. Faulty Fountains of Youth Unit 2: The Quality of Later Life 7. Stop Smoking and Benefits Come Quickly 8. Life after Death 9. Lifetime Achievements 10. We Can Control How We Age Unit 3: Societal Attitudes toward Old Age 11. Society Fears the Aging Process 12. A Healthy Mind, a Longer Life 13. The Secret Lives of Single Women 14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its Threat to Business Vitality Unit 4: Problems and Potentials of Aging 15. Alzheimer’s—The Case for Prevention 16. Trust and Betrayal in the Golden Years 17. Elderly Americans at Highest Risk for Suicide: Few Prevention Programs Target Their Needs, Sarah Skidmore 18. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of Older Women and Their Relationship with Health Outcomes
123
Sociology Unit 5: Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma? 19. Retire Righ 20. Money for Life 21. Old. Smart. Productive. 22. Low-Cost Retirement 23. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of Older Americans Unit 6: The Experience of Dying 24. Development of Hospice and Palliative Care in the United States 25. The Grieving Process 26. Moving toward Peace: An Analysis of the Concept of a Good Death 27. Mind Frames towards Dying and Factors Motivating Their Adoption by Terminally Ill Elder Unit 7: Living Environment in Later Life 28. Making Your House Work 29. The Nursing Home Culture-Change Movement: Recent Past, Present, and Future Directions for Research 30. The Place of Assisted Living in Long-Term Care and Related Service Systems 31. Declaration of Independents: Home Is Where You Want to Live Forever. Here’s How Unit 8: Social Policies, Programs, and Services for Older Americans 32. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population 33. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years of Reform 34. Age Wave 35. Coverage for All 36. Riding into the Sunset: The Geezer Threat 37. Paying for It 38. As Good as It Gets 39. Population Aging Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
Chapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss Chapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition Chapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents Chapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults Chapter 12 – Suicide Chapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern World Chapter 14 – Beyond Death / After Life Chapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices
Sociology of Death – Readers
NEW
*9780078127670* ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, AND BEREAVEMENT 09/10 11th Edition George E Dickinson, College of Charleston Michael R Leming, Saint Olaf College 2010 / Softcover / 192 pages ISBN: 9780078127670 Available: March 2009
Sociology of Death
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH AND DYING 8th Edition Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College and Albert Lee Strickland 2009 / Hardcover / 688 pages ISBN: 9780073405469 Available: July 2008
www.mhhe.com/despelder8e The best-selling textbook in the field, The Last Dance offers an interdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying. Integrating the experiential, scholarly, social, individual, emotional, and intellectual dimensions of death and dying, the eighth edition of this acclaimed text has been thoroughly revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensive coverage of death studies. Together with its companion volumes, this new edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory and research, as well as practical application to students’ lives. CONTENTS Chapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change Chapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of Sociocultural Forces Chapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and Historical Chapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and Institutions Chapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public Policy Chapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness Chapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and Decisions
NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_Dying_Death_and Bereavement_0910.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by DeSpelder/Strickland. CONTENTS Unit 1: Issues in Dying and Death 1. Death, Dying, and the Dead in Popular Culture 2. Dealing with the Dead Patient at the Intensive Care Unit 3. How Much Is More Life Worth?, 4. Confronting Death: Perceptions of a Good Death in Adults with Lung Cancer
124
Sociology 5. Estimating Excess Mortality in Post-Invasion Iraq 6. The Sociology of Death Unit 2: Dying and Death across the Life Cycle 7. Rituals of Unburdening 8. To Live with No Regrets 9. ‘’Cast Me Not Off in Old Age’’ 10. Caregiving Systems at the End of Life: How Informal Caregivers and Formal Providers Collaborate 11. Needs of Elderly Patients in Palliative Care 12. Altered States: What I’ve Learned about Death & Disability 13. Life after Death Unit 3: The Dying Process 14. The Comfort Connection 15. Are They Hallucinations or Are They Real? The Spirituality of Deathbed and Near-Death Visions 16. Dying on the Streets: Homeless Persons’ Concerns and Desires about End-of-Life Care 17. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns toward Dying in Prison Unit 4: Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide 18. Death and the Law 19. What Living Wills Won’t Do: The Limits of Autonomy 20. Ethics and Life’s Ending: An Exchange 21. Suicidal Thoughts among College Students More Common than Expected 22. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame Unit 5: Funerals 23. The Tuneful Funeral 24. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects 25. The Arlington Ladies 26. Green Graveyards—A Natural Way to Go 27. Social Workers’ Final Act of Service: Respectful Burial Arrangements for Indigent, Unclaimed, and Unidentified People Unit 6: Bereavement 28. The Grieving Process 29. Disenfranchised Grief 30. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief 31. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning: The Onslaught Is Just Beginning 32. Life Is Like the Seasons 33. Counseling with Children in Contemporary Society Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
Urban Sociology
NEW
*9780078127717* ANNUAL EDITIONS: URBAN SOCIETY 14th Edition Myron Alfred Levine, Wright State UniversityDayton 2010 / Softcover / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127717 Available: February 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127718.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Urban Growth, Decline, and Renaissance 1. Can Buffalo Ever Come Back? 2. Skipping the City for the Suburbs 3. Return to Center 4. Predatory Lending: Redlining in Reverse 5. Bridge Blockade after Katrina Remains Divisive Issue UNIT 2: Gentrification, Globalization and the City 6. Movers & Shakers: How Immigrants Are Reviving Neighborhoods Given up for Dead 7. Measuring Globalization 8. Microsoft’s Call-Center Business in India Gets an American Accent 9. The Rise of the Creative Class, Richard Florida, The Rise of the Creative Clas 10. Too Much Froth 11. The Gentry, Misjudged as Neighbors UNIT 3: Competitive Pressures and Economic Development 12. WiFi Free-for-All 13. Throwaway Stadium 14. Skybox Skeptics 15. “A Lot of Hooey”: Heywood Sanders on Convention Center Economics 16. Eminent Domain Revisited 17. Legislative and Judicial Reactions to Kelo: Eminent Domain’s Continuing Role in Redevelopment UNIT 4: Citizen Participation 18. Jane Jacobs’ Radical Legacy 19. Neighbor Power: Building Community the Seattle Way 20. New Life in Newark
125
Sociology UNIT 5: School Choice and School Reform 21. The Performance of Charter Schools in Wisconsin 22. Charter Schools 23. First Principals 24. With More Choice Has Come Resegregation 25. Here Comes the Neighborhood, Damien Jackson 26. The UCLA Civil Rights Project State of Segregation: Fact Sheet, 2007 27. Joint Statement of Nine University-Based Civil Rights Centers on Today’s Supreme Court Rulings on Voluntary School Desegregation: McFarland v. Jefferson County Public Schools & Parents Involved in Community Schools v. Seattle School District No. 1 UNIT 6: Policing and Crime 28. Broken Windows 29. How an Idea Drew People Back to Urban Life UNIT 7: A Suburban Nation: Suburban Growth, Diversity, and the Possibilities of a “New Urbanism” and a “New Regionalism” 30. The Six Suburban Eras of the United States 31. Patio Man and the Sprawl People: America’s Newest Suburbs 32. Affluent, but Needy (First Suburbs) 33. Principles of New Urbanism 34. Rocking-Chair Revival: Nostalgic Front Porch Makes a Comeback in a New Century 35. HOPE VI and the New Urbanism: Eliminating Low-Income Housing to Make Mixed-Income Communities 36. Regional Coalition-Building and the Inner Suburbs fit. 37. Is Regional Government the Answer? UNIT 8: Toward Sustainable Cities and Suburbs? 38. Firebugs: Build It in California’s Foothills, and It Will Burn 39. New German Community Models Car-Free Living 40. Traffic: Why It’s Getting Worse, What Government Can Do 41. Is Congestion Pricing Ready for Prime Time? UNIT 9: The Future of Cities and Suburbs: The United States and the World 42. Demolishing Delhi: World Class City in the Making 43. Femicide in Ciudad Juárez: What Can Planners Do? 44. Are Europe’s Cities Better? Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
Race and Ethnicity AMERICAN ETHNICITY: THE DYNAMICS AND CONSEQUENCES OF DISCRIMINATION 6th Edition Adalberto Jr Aguirre and Jonathan H Turner of University of California - Riverside 2009 / Softcover ISBN: 9780073404219 Available: September 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/aguirre6e American Ethnicity is a brief text that provides an accessible introduction to the dynamics of racial and ethnic relations. Key concepts and theories are summarized, and the authors develop a simple theoretical framework that guides the presentation of data on each of the prominent ethnic groups in America. As a result, this book examines each ethnic group from the same perspective, allowing students to compare the dynamics of discrimination against African Americans, Native Americans, Asian and Pacific Island Americans, white ethnic Americans, and Latinos. The sixth edition offers expanded theoretical framework through the inclusion of the Social Identity Theory. CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1. Ethnicity and Ethnic Relations Chapter 2. Explaining Ethnic Relations Chapter 3. The Anglo-Saxon Core and Ethnic Antagonism Chapter 4. White Ethnic Americans Chapter 5. African Americans Chapter 6. Native Americans Chapter 7. Latinos Chapter 8. Asian and Pacific Island Americans Chapter 9. Arab Americans Chapter 10. The Future of Ethnicity in America
126
Sociology RETHINKING THE COLOR LINE: READINGS IN RACE AND ETHNICITY 4th Edition Charles A. Gallagher, La Salle University 2009 / Softcover / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073404271 Available: December 2008
http://www.mhhe.com/gallagher4e Rethinking the Color Line is a user-friendly text that does not sacrifice intellectual or theoretical rigor. This anthology of current research examines contemporary issues and explores new approaches to the study of race and ethnic relations. The featured readings effectively engage students by helping them understand theories and concepts, and encourage active learning in the classroom all while providing relevance for students from all ethnic, racial, cultural, and economic backgrounds. The new fourth edition features 8 new readings as well as a new two-color design that brings attention to the “Seeing the Big Picture” and “Questions to Consider” boxes found throughout the text. CONTENTS Introduction: Rethinking the Color Line: Understanding How Boundaries Shift Part I: Sorting By Color: Why We Attach Meaning To Race 1. How Our Skins Got Their Color 2. Drawing the Color Line 3. Racial Formations 4. Theoretical Perspectives in Race and Ethnic Relations 5. Racialized Social Systems: Understanding Racism 6. An Overview of Trends in Social and Economic Well-Being 7. The Color of Health in the United States 8. Transformative Assets, The Racial Wealth Gap and the American Dream 9. Defining Race: Comparative Perspectives 10. A Tour of Indian People and Indian Lands 11. Asian American Panethnicity: Contemporary National and Transnational Possibilities 12. Beyond Black and White: Remaking Race in America 13. Color Blind Privilege: The Social and Political Functions of Erasing the Color Line in Post Race America 14. The Ideology of Colorblindness 15. The Possibility of a New Racial Hierarchy in the Twenty-FirstCentury United States Part II: Prejudice, Discrimination, and Racism 16. Race Prejudice as a Sense of Group Position Seeing the Big Picture: Racism: Group Position or Individual Belief? 17. Discrimination and the American Creed 18. Race and Civil Rights Pre-September 11, 2001: The Targeting of Arabs and Muslims 19. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness 20. Laissez-Fair Racism, Racial Inequality and the Role of the Social Sciences 21. Residential Segregation and Neighborhood Conditions in U.S. Metropolitan Areas 22. The Code of the Streets 23. Environmental Justice in the 21st Century: Race Still Matters 24. Race, Religion, and the Color Line (or is that the Color Wall?) 25. Why Are There No Supermarkets in my Neighborhood: The Long Search for Fresh Fruit, Produce and Inexpensive Healthy Food Part III: Racialized Opportunity in Social Institutions 26. No Equal Justice: The Color of Punishment 27. Everyday Racism on the Police Force 28. .…and the Poor Get Prison 29. The Mark of a Criminal Record 30. Kristin v. Aisha; Brad v. Rasheed: What’s in a Name and How it Effects Getting a Job 31. When the Pot Boils Over; The Irish, Jews, Blacks and Koreans of New York
32. “There’s No Shame in My Game”: Status and Stigma Among Harlem’s Working Poor 33. Sweatshops in Sunset Park: A Variation of Late Twentieth-Century Chinese Garment Shops in New York City 34. Hispanics in the American South and the Transformation of the Poultry Industry 35. Broadcast News Portrayal of Minorities: Accuracy in Reporting 36. Television and the Politics of Representation 37. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment 38. Winnebagos, Cherokees, Apaches and Dakotas: The Persistence of Stereotyping of American Indians in American Advertising 39. Sport in America: The New Racial Stereotypes Part IV: How America’s Complexion Changes 40. The Melting Pot and the Color Line 41. Who are the Other African Americans? Contemporary African and Caribbean Immigrants in the United States 42. The Arab Immigrant Experience 43. Ethnic and Racial Identities of Second-Generation Black Immigrants in New York City 44. Guess Who’s Been Coming to Dinner? Trends in Interracial Marriage over the 20th Century 45. Captain Kirk Kisses Lieutenant Uhura: Interracial Intimacies From Hollywood 46. Discovering Racial Borders 47. Redrawing the Color-Line? : The Problems and Possibilities of Multiracial Families and Group Making 48. Closing the Racial Inequality Gap: A Plan For Action 49. Ten Things You Can Do To Improve Race Relations Appendix: Race by the Numbers—America’s Racial Report Card
127
Sociology
Race and Ethnicity – Readers
NEW
*9780078127625* ANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE AND ETHNIC RELATIONS 17th Edition John A Kromkowski, Catholic University of America 2010 / Softcover / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127625 Available: January 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127629.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: ww.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_Race_and_Ethnic_Relations_17e.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 17/e with the corresponding chapters in two of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Aguirre/ Turner and Kottak/Kozaitis. CONTENTS UNIT 1: Local Experiences of Racial and Ethnic Identity, Communities, and Diversity in America 1. Cambridge Makes History 2. Chicago and the Irish 3. `Bursting with Pride’ in Little Italy 4. Parishes in Transition: Holding on While Letting Go and Old ¬Order Changing on South Bend’s West Side 5. In Manassas, the Medium Is the Issue 6. In Brooklyn, an Evolving Ethnicity 7. Mélange Cities 8. The Hotel Africa 9. The Fixer UNIT 2: The Legal Construction of Diversity and Disparity Section A 10. Racial Restrictions in the Law of Citizenship 11. Dred Scott v. Sandford 12. Brown et al. v. Board of Education of Topeka et al 13. How the GOP Conquered the South
14. `Bakke’ Set a New Path to Diversity for Colleges 15. Shaare Tefila Congregation v. CobbandSaint Francis College v. Al-Khazraji Section B 16. Historical Discrimination in the Immigration Laws 17. The Diversity Visa Lottery—A Cycle of Unintended Consequences in United States Immigration Policy UNIT 3: The Demography of Ethnicity 18. Ancestry 2000: Census 2000 Brief 19. Minority Population Tops 100 Million and More than 300 Counties Now “Majority-Minority” 20. Irish-American Heritage Month (March) and St. Patrick’s Day (March 17) 2008 21. A Profile of Today’s Italian Americans: A Report Based on the Year 2000 Census Compiled by the Sons of Italy 22. Polonia in Numbers: How Many of Us Are out There? 23. Still Unmelted after All These Years UNIT 4: Indigenous Ethnic Groups 24. Who Is a Native American? 25. American Indian and Alaska Native Heritage Month: November 2008 26. Tribal Philanthropy Thrives UNIT 5: African Americans 27. Black History Month: February 2008, U.S. Department of Commerce 28. Who Is an African American? 29. That’s a Bare-Knuckles Kiss 30. African American Philanthropy 31. For Black Politicians, a Rocky Road but a Steady Climb UNIT 6: Hispanic/Latina/o Americans 32. Inventing Hispanics: A Diverse Minority Resists Being Labeled 33. Hispanic Heritage Month and Cinco De Mayo 34. Minority-Owned Firms More Likely to Export UNIT 7: Asian Americans 35. To Be Asian in America 36. Lands of Opportunity 37. Asian/Pacific American Heritage Month and Revenues for AsianOwned Firms Up 24 Percent UNIT 8: European and Mediterranean Ethnics 38. Miracle: American Polonia 39. This Writer’s Life: Gay Talese, Michael Luongo, Ambassador: The National Italian American Foundation 40. Forces That Shape Ethnic Opinion: What Ethnic Americans Really Think 41. Neither Natural Allies Nor Irreconcilable Foes: Alliance Building Efforts between African Americans and Immigrants 42. The Study of Jewish American History and Dutch American History in Several Settings UNIT 9: The Presidential Election 2008 43. A More Perfect Union 44. Pulling the Race Card from the Deck 45. Polonia and the Elections: Why We Matter? 46. White Seniors Energize McCain Campaign 47. Is Obama the End of Black Politics? UNIT 10: Understanding International Aspects of Ethnic Relations 48. Obama & Israel 49. American Self-Interest and the Response to Genocide 50. Never Underestimate the Power of Ethnicity in Iraq 51. Is Ethnic Conflict Inevitable? Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
128
Sociology
Political Sociology
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN RACE AND ETHNICITY 7th Edition Raymond D’Angelo, Saint Joseph’s College Herbert Douglas, Rowan University 2009 / Softcover / 456 pages ISBN: 9780073515373 Available: October 2008
NEW
*9780078111563*
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351537x.mhtml TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN RACE AND ETHNICITY, 7/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available online for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online. CONTENTS Part 1 Race, Ethnicity and American Identity Issue 1. Do Americans Need a Common Identity? Issue 2. Does Immigration Contribute to a Better America? Issue 3. Do Recent Immigration Trends Challenge Existing Ideas of America’s White Identity? Issue 4. Is Today’s Immigration Debate Racist? Part 2 Race Still Matters: Prejudice, Discrimination, and Racial Minorities Issue 5. Is Race Prejudice a Product of Group Position? Issue 6. Do Minorities and Whites Engage in Self-segregation? Issue 7. Is the Emphasis on a Color-Blind Society an Answer to Racism? Issue 8. Is the Claim of White Skin Privilege a Myth? ? Part 3 Persistence of Discrimination Issue 9. Is Racism a Permanent Feature of American Society? Issue 10. Is Racial Profiling Defensible Public Policy? Issue 11. Did Hurricane Katrina Expose Racism in New Orleans? Issue 12. Is the Reservation the Only Source of Community for Native Americans? Part 4 Persistent Conflicts: Dynamics of a Changing Population Issue 13. Are America’s Public Schools Resegregating? Issue 14. Is There Room for Bilingual Education in American Schools? Issue 15. Is It Time to De-emphasize Diversity? Issue 16. Are Asian Americans a Model Minority? Part 5 Policy Issues for the Twenty-First Century Issue 17. Does Latino Immigration Threaten African American Workers? Issue 18. Should Race Be Included Among the Many Factors Considered for Admission to Selective Colleges? Issue 19. Is Affirmative Action Necessary to Achieve Racial Equality in the United States Today? Issue 20. Is Now the Time for Reparations for African Americans?
WHO RULES AMERICA? POWER, POLITICS, AND SOCIAL CHANGE 6th Edition G William Domhoff, University of CaliforniaSanta Cruz 2010 / Softcover / 288 pages ISBN: 9780078111563 Available: July 2009 Drawing from a power elite perspective and the latest empirical data, this classic text is an invaluable tool for teaching students about how power operates in U.S. society. Domhoff argues that the owners and top-level managers in large income-producing properties are far and away the dominant figures in the U.S. Their corporations, banks, and agribusinesses come together as a corporate community that dominates the federal government in Washington and their real estate, construction, and land development companies form growth coalitions that dominate most local governments. By providing empirical evidence for his argument, Domhoff encourages students to think critically about the power structure in American society and its implications for our democracy. NEW TO THIS EDITION v Updated content throughout reflects the latest research findings on the structure and distribution of power in the U.S., new scholarship on the role of public opinion, the most recent government statistics on key power issues, new cabinet level appointments for 2008, and the most up-to-date campaign finance data. v A reorganized and updated Chapter 4, The Policy-Planning Network, provides clearer and more cohesive coverage, up-to-date data on the role of foundations in the inner city, and expanded material on the importance of foundations to middle-class charitable and educational groups. v Expanded perspectives on problem solving include additional emphasis on practical solutions to the contemporary issues raised in the text as well as more on the difficulties of progressive social change and possible answers. v Expanded perspectives on problem solving include additional emphasis on practical solutions to the contemporary issues raised in the text as well as more on the difficulties of progressive social change and possible answers. v
Stronger emphasis on Globalization throughout the book.
CONTENTS Introduction 1. Class and Power in America 2. The Corporate Community 3. The Corporate Community and the Upper Class 4. The Policy-Planning Network 5. The Role of Public Opinion 6. Parties and Elections 7. How the Power Elite Dominates Government 8. The Big Picture 9. Potential Challenges to Class Domination Appendix A: Indicators of Upper-Class Standing
129
Sociology
NEW
*9780078127816* ANNUAL EDITIONS: DEVELOPING WORLD 10/11 20th Edition Robert J Griffiths, University of NCGreensboro 2010 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780078127816 Available: October 2009
http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127815.mhtml Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is offered as a practical guide for instructors. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.
24. Will the Kenyan Settlement Hold? 25. Mexico’s Drug Wars Get Brutal 26. Dangerous Liaisons 27. Call in the Blue Helmets Unit 4: Political Change in the Developing World 28. Asia’s Democracy Backlash 29. India Held Back 30. `Bring Me My Machine Gun’ 31. Who Will Speak for Islam? 32. Free at Last? 33. Iran in Search of Itself 34. Lula’s Brazil 35. An Empty Revolution Unit 5: Population, Resources, Environment, and Health 36. Booms, Busts, and Echoes 37. Emerging Water Shortages 38. Water Warriors 39. Soot from Third World Stoves Is New Target in Climate Fight 40. Population, Human Resources, Health, and the Environment 41. Protecting Climate Refugees 42. Reversal of Fortune Unit 6: Women and Development 43. Women’s Rights as Human Rights 44. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development 45. Education: It’s Not Just about the Boys. Get Girls into School 46. Women in the Middle East: Progress and Backlash 47. Women in Developing Countries 300 Times More Likely to Die in Childbirth 48. Recession Hits Women in Developing Countries Test-Your-Knowledge Form Article Rating Form
NEW TO THIS EDITION v Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/ AE_Health_1011.pdf v This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions: Health 10/11 with the corresponding chapters in three of our bestselling McGraw-Hill Health textbooks by Hahn et al., Payne et al., and Insel/Roth. CONTENTS Unit 1: Understanding the Developing World 1. The New Face of Development 2. How Development Leads to Democracy 3. The Ideology of Development 4. Africa’s Village of Dreams 5. The Case against the West 6. Development as Poison Unit 2: Political Economy and the Developing World 7. Industrial Revolution 2.0 8. The Toxins Trickle Downward 9. The Poor Man’s Burden 10. Social Justice and Global Trade 11. Cotton: The Huge Moral Issue 12. Across Globe, Empty Bellies Bring Rising Anger 13. The Politics of Hunger 14. The New Colonialists 15. Power to the People 16. The Micromagic of Microcredit 17. The Coming Revolution in Africa Unit 3: Conflict and Instability 18. The End of War? 19. Fixing a Broken World 20. The Roots of Failure in Afghanistan 21. Pakistan’s Perilous Voyage 22. The Shiite “Threat” Revisited 23. The Most Dangerous Place in the World
130
Sociology
Social Inequality / Social Stratification
THE SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF DIFFERENCE AND INEQUALITY: RACE, CLASS, GENDER AND SEXUALITY 4th Edition
SOCIAL STRATIFICATION AND INEQUALITY 7th Edition
Tracy E Ore, St Cloud State University 2009 / Softcover / 816 pages ISBN: 9780073380087 Available: February 2008
Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4
Harold R Kerbo, California Polytechnic State University 2009 / Softcover / 744 pages ISBN: 9780073380070 Available: March 2008
Praised for its thorough research and scholarship, Social Stratification and Inequality provides a comprehensive, up-to-date exploration of the global economic and social divisions in human societies. While the book is grounded in the nature of social stratification in the United States, this edition maintains a commitment to keeping a global perspective. Comparative information on the United States and other countries and an overview of changes in social stratification, gives readers a global perspective on class conflict.
This anthology examines the social construction of race, class, gender, and sexuality and the institutional bases for these relations. While other texts discuss various forms of stratification and the impact of these on members of marginalized groups, Ore provides a thorough discussion of how such systems of stratification are formed and perpetuated and how forms of stratification are interconnected. Critical thinking questions at the end of each reading and part opening essays aid students in understanding how the material relates to their lives and how their own attitudes, actions, and perspectives may serve to perpetuate a stratified system. 13 new readings have been added focusing on the experiences of immigrants, contemporary issues in social institutions, current examples of how the media portrays events and much more.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Part One: Introduction Chapter 1: Perspectives and Concepts in the Study of Social Stratification Chapter 2: Dimensions of Inequality in the United States Chapter 3: Social Stratification in Human Societies: The History of Inequality Part Two: Explanations of Social Stratification: Stratification Theories Chapter 4: Social Stratification Theory: Early Statements Chapter 5: Modern Theories of Social Stratification Part Three: The American Class Structure Chapter 6: The Upper Class Chapter 7: The Corporate Class Chapter 8: The Middle and Working Classes Chapter 9: Poverty and the Political Economy of Welfare Chapter 10: Gender Stratification and Inequalities: The Persistence of Ascription Chapter 11: Inequalities of Race and Ethnicity:The Persistence of Ascription Part Four: The Process of Social Stratification Chapter 12: Social Mobility: Class Ascription and Achievement Chapter 13: The Process of Legitimation Part Five: Social Stratification Beyond the United States Chapter 14: The World Stratification System:Dominance and Competition Among Core Nations Chapter 15: Social Stratification in Japan Chapter 16: Social Stratification in Germany Chapter 17: World Stratification and Globalization: The Poor of This Earth
* An asterisk indicates a new reading. Preface Part I: Constructing Differences Race & Ethnicity 1. Racial Formations- Michael Omi and Howard Winant 2. Optional Ethnicities: For Whites Only?- Mary C. Waters *3. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from Immigrant Communities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen 4. How Jews Became White Folks and What that Says about Race in America- Karen Brodkin Social Class 5. Race, Wealth, and Equality- Melvin L. Oliver and Thomas M. Shapiro 6. Media Magic: Making Class Invisible- Gregory Mantsios *7. Doubly Divided: The Racial Wealth Gap- Meizhu Lui *8. Getting Corporations off the Public Dole- Janice Shields Sex & Gender 9. The Social Construction of Gender- Judith Lorber *10. The Five Sexes, Revisited- Anne Fausto-Sterling 11. The Transgender Paradigm Shift toward Free Expression- Holly Boswell 12. Masculinity as Homophobia: Fear, Shame, and Silence in the Construction of Gender Identity- Michael S. Kimmel Sexuality 13. The Invention of Heterosexuality- Jonathan Ned Katz *14. Sexuality and Gender in Children’s Daily Worlds- Barrie Thorne and Zella Luria 15. Sexual Identity and Bisexual Identities: The Struggle for SelfDescription in a Changing Sexual Landscape- Paula C. Rust 16. Naming All the Parts- Kate Bornstein Part II: Maintaining Inequalities: Systems of Oppression & Privilege Social Institutions Family 17. Our Mothers’ Grief: Racial Ethnic Women and the Maintenance of Families- Bonnie Thornton Dill 18. Families on the Fault Line: America’s Working Class Speaks About the Family, the Economy, Race, and Ethnicity- Lillian B. Rubin 19. Stability and Change in Chicano Men’s Family Lives- Scott Coltrane *20. Gay and Lesbian Families Are Here- Judith Stacey Education 21. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools- Jonathan Kozol 22. Preparing for Power: Cultural Capital and Curricula in America’s Elite Boarding Schools- Peter W. Cookson, Jr and Caroline Hodges Persell
http://www.mhhe.com/kerbo7e
131
Sociology 23. Civilize Them with a Stick- Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes 24. Missing in Interaction- Myra Sadker and David Sadker *25. Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality- Melinda Miceli Work & the Economy 26. Jobless Ghettos: The Social Implications of the Disappearance of Work in Segregated Neighborhoods- William J. Wilson 27. “We’d Love to Hire Them But?”: The Meaning of Race for Employers- Joleen Kirschenman and Kathryn M. Neckerman 28. The Glass Escalator: Hidden Advantages for Men in the ‘Female’ Professions- Christine L. Williams 29. Cause of Death: Inequality- Alejandro Reuss The State & Public Policy *30. Welfare Reform, Family Hardship, and Women of Color- Linda Burnham *31. Beyond Crime and Punishment- Bruce Western and Becky Petit 32. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American Television Domestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch 33. The Effects of Affirmative Action on Other Stakeholders- Barbara Reskin 34. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness: Racialized Social Democracy and the “White” Problem in American Studies- George Lipsitz Media 35. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TV Domestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch 36. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment- Robert *37. Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces: Will and Grace and the Situation Comedy Genre- Kathleen Battles and Wendy HiltonMorrow *38. Metahors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames, and Their Consequences in Hurricane Katrina- Kathleen Tierney, Christine Bevc, and Erica Kuligowski Language & Culture 39. Racism in the English Language- Robert B. Moore 40. Self, Identity & the Naming Question: Reflections on the Language of Disability- Irving Kenneth Zola 41. How to Tame a Wild Tongue- Gloria Anzaldúa 42. The Dark Side of Sports Symbols- Stanley D. Eitzen and Maxine Baca Zinn Violence & Social Control 43. Where Race and Gender Meet: Racism, Hate Crimes, and Pornography- Helen Zia 44. Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why are Some Fraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?- A. Ayres Boswell & Joan Z. Spade 45. The Construction of Masculinity and the Triad of Men’s ViolenceMichael Kaufman 46. Homophobia as a Weapon of Sexism- Suzanne Pharr Part III: Experiencing Difference & Inequality in Everyday Life 47. Making Systems of Privilege Visible- Stephanie M. Wildman with Adrienne D. Davis. 48. “Yes, I Follow Islam, But I’m Not a Terrorist”- Nada El Sawy 49. A Dozen Demons- Ellis Cose *50. Always Running- La Vida Loca, Gang Days in L.A.- Luis Rodriguez 51. The Story of My Body- Judith Ortiz Cofer *52. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from Immigrant Communities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen 53. “Gee, You Don’t Seem Like An Indian From the Reservation”Barbara Cameron *54. Living Fearlessly With and Within Differences: My Search for Identity Beyond Categories and Contradictions- Shefali MilczarekDesai 55. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting by in America- Barbara Ehrenreich 56. I Am Your Welfare Reform- Annie Downey 57. Learning to Fight- Geoffrey Canada 58. Bisexuality, Feminism, Men, and Me- Robyn Ochs Part IV: Resistance & Social Change 59. Toward a New Vision: Race, Class, and Gender as Categories of Analysis and Connection- Patricia Hill Collins
60. Cultural Resistance: Reconstructing Our Own Images- Yen Le Espritu *61.Good for the Hood?- Anmol Chaddha 62. Seeing More Than Black & White: Latinos, Racism, and the Cultural Divides- Elizabeth Martinez *63. How White People Can Serve as Allies to People of Color in the Struggle to End Racism- Paul Kivel 64. Dismantling Noah’s Ark: Gender and Equality- Judith Lorber *65. Voices of a New Movimiento- Roberto Lovato Index * An asterisk indicates a new reading.
THE MEANING OF DIFFERENCE: AMERICAN CONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE, SEX AND GENDER, SOCIAL CLASS, AND SEXUAL ORIENTATION 5th Edition Karen E Rosenblum, George Mason University Toni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University 2009 / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073380056 Available: January 2008
Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5 The Meaning of Difference focuses on the social construction of difference as it operates in American formulations of race and ethnicity, sex and gender, social class, sexual orientation, and disability. The conceptual structure of this text-reader comes from four framework essays addressing the construction of difference, the experience of difference, the social meaning of difference, and social action that might bridge differences. Each framework essay is followed by a set of readings selected for readability, conceptual depth, and applicability to a variety of statuses. Boxed inserts throughout offer first-person accounts from real people, many of them students. This edition features an expanded focus on disability and 29 new readings, including articles on how immigration is transforming the nature of American race and ethnic categories, the changing shape of higher education, and the experience of Americans of MiddleEastern descent. CONTENTS Section I - Framework Essay: Constructing Categories of Difference What is Race? What Is Sex? What Is Gender? What Is Social Class? What Is Sexual Orientation? What is Disability? Section II - Framework Essay: Experiencing Difference Race and Ethnicity Sex and Gender Sexual Orientation Social Class Disability Section III - Framework Essay: The Meaning of Difference Intersectionality Law, Politics, and Policy Language Section IV - Framework Essay: Bridging Differences
132
Sociology
Sociological Theory
CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 5th Edition George Ritzer, University of Maryland–College Park 2008 / 552 pages ISBN: 9780073528175 Available: June 2007
NEW
*9780078026652* CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 6th Edition George Ritzer, University of Maryland—College Park 2011 / 544 pages ISBN: 9780078026652 Available: March 2010
CONTENTS
[Details unavailable at press time]
NEW
*9780078111679* SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 8th Edition George Ritzer, University of Maryland—College Park 2011 / 768 ISBN: 9780078111679 Available: March 2010
[Details unavailable at press time]
The fifth edition of Classical Sociological Theory by George Ritzer, one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers a comprehensive overview of the major classical theorists and schools of sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographical sketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical and intellectual context. This helps students to better understand the original works of classical authors as well as to compare and contrast classical theories.
Biographical and Autobiographical Sketches Preface Part I. Introduction To Sociological Theory Chapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early Years Chapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later Years Part II: Classical Sociological Theory Chapter 3. Alexis de Tocqueville Chapter 4. August Comte Chapter 5. Herbert Spencer Chapter 6. Karl Marx Chapter 7. Emile Durkheim Chapter 8. Max Weber Chapter 9. Georg Simmel Chapter 10. Early Women Sociologists and Classical Sociological Theory, 1830-1930 Chapter 11. W.E.B. DuBois Chapter 12. Thorstein Veblen Chapter 13. Karl Mannheim Chapter 14. George Herbert Mead Chapter 15. Alfred Schutz Chapter 16. Talcott Parsons References Permissions Acknowlegments Index
133
Sociology International Edition
International Edition
MODERN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 7th Edition
SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 7th Edition
George Ritzer, University of Maryland–College Park 2008 / Softcover / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073404103 ISBN: 9780071101776 [IE] Available: May 2007
George Ritzer, University of Maryland-College Park 2008 / 816 pages ISBN: 9780073528182 ISBN: 9780071284066 [IE] Available: June 2007
The seventh edition of Modern Sociological Theory by George Ritzer, one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers a comprehensive overview of the major contemporary schools of sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographical sketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical and intellectual context. This helps students to better understand the original works and helps them appreciate the diversity of contemporary theory.
The seventh edition of Sociological Theory by George Ritzer, one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers a comprehensive overview of the major theorists and schools of sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographical sketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical and intellectual context. This helps students to better understand the original works of classical and modern theorists as well as to compare and contrast the latest substantive theories.
CONTENTS Part I: Introduction Chapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early Years Chapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later Years
